-------
2.0 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Concept
The Optec LPV-2 transmissometer has been designed to measure the
ability of the atmosphere to transmit light of a specific wavelength
(550 nm, green). It accomplishes this by measuring the loss in light
received from a light source of known intensity as the light beam travels
a known distant.
The LPV-2 transmissometer has two primary components: a light source
(transmitter), and a light detector (receiver) as displayed in Figure 2-1. -»
Depending on the average visual air quality, the components are generally 2
placed from .5 to 10 kilometers apart. The system can take measurements
-------
Transmitter
Receiver
Figure 2-1. Optec LPV-2 Transmissometer System.
4
-------
The Intensity of the light emitted from the transmitter is precisely
controlled by an optical feedback system which continuously samples the
center 0.17 degree portion of the outgoing beam and makes fine adjustments
to keep the light output constant. Although the lamp light is white, only
the green (550 nm) portion of the output is monitored and controlled by the
feedback circuitry.
Light emitted from the transmitter is "chopped" at 78 pulses a second
by a mechanical spinning disk located in front of the lamp. The light is
chopped to allow the receiver computer to differentiate the lamp signal from
the background or ambient lighting. By using this technique, the transmis-
someter can operate day and night.
The transmissometer can be operated in either a "continuous" or "cycled"
mode. In the continuous mode, the transmitter projects the chopped signal
continuously. To prolong lamp life, reduce power consumption, or to accom-
modate various sampling strategies, the transmitter can be operated in the
cycled mode. In the cycled mode, the transmitter can be set to turn on at
precise intervals and to stay on for selected durations as shown below:
Intervals Durations
20 minute 2 minutes
1 hour 16 minute
2 hour 32 minute
4 hour 64 minute
For example, with an interval setting of 1 hour and a duration setting
of 16 minutes, the transmitter would turn on every hour and stay on for 16
minutes. Other combinations, such as a 2-hour interval and a duration of 2
minutes, are possible. A push-button switch in the transmitter control box
defines the start time of the intervals. When using the system in a cycled
mode, the transmitter and receiver clocks must be synchronized.
The transmitter is not weatherproof and requires a shelter. The
instrument can operate at ambient temperatures. Primary specifications
for the transmitter are listed in Section 7.0, Figure 7-2.
2.3 Receiver
The function of the LPV-2 receiver is to:
o Gather light from the transmitter;
o Convert it to an electrical signal;
o Isolate and measure the received transmitter light; and
o Calculate and output visibility results in the desired form.
-------
The receiver has three components: 1) a long focal-length telescope;
2) a photodetector eyepiece assembly; and 3) a low power computer. Receiver
components are shown in Section 7.0, Figure 7-8.
The telescope gathers the transmitter light and focuses it on a
photodiode that converts it to an electrical signal. The receiver
computer "locks-on" to the transmitter light's chopped frequency and
separates the transmitter light from ambient lighting. The received
signal can be described as an AC waveform (chopped transmitter light)
carried on a DC voltage (background lighting). The effect of atmospheric
turbulence is minimized by using 62,500 samples of the signal to calculate
a one-minute average reading.
The computer compares the measured transmitter light with the known
(calibrated) transmitter light to calculate the transmission of the
intervening atmosphere.
Like the transmitter, the receiver is equipped with an eyepiece to
precisely aim the detector, and an interval timer to control the interval
and duration of measurements. The battery-backed interval timer can be
user-set to start the readings at precise intervals and define the averaging
time as shown:
Intervals Durations
20 minute 1 minute
1 hour 10 minute
2 hour 30 minute
4 hour 60 minute
For example, with an interval setting of 1 hour and an averaging time
of 10 minutes, the computer would provide one 10-minute averaged reading
every hour. Other combinations, such as an interval of 4 hours and an
averaging time of 60 minutes, are possible. The receiver computer has a
momentary switch to define the start time of the intervals and to synchronize
the receiver and transmitter timers when the system is used in the cycled
mode.
The transmissometer system timing used in the National Park Service
monitoring network is as follows:
HR:MI:SEC Action
09:00:00 Transmitter turns on
09:03:00 Receiver begins 10-minute average reading
09:13:20 Receiver finishes reading, toggle changes
09:16:00 Transmitter turns off
10:00:00 Transmitter turns on
Sequence repeats hourly
The transmitter duration (lamp on) times are greater than the computer
averaging times to allow for timing system clock drift.
-------
The receiver is not weatherproof, and requires a shelter. The
instrument can operate at ambient temperature. Primary specifications for
the receiver are listed -in Section 7.0, Figure 7-3.
2.4 Data Output
The receiver computer outputs visibility measurements to data loggers
in the following user-selected formats:
1. Raw receiver reading (counts)
2. Extinction (km'1)
3. Visual range (km)
The working path distance must be measured to the nearest 0.01
kilometer. In most cases, a slope-distance measurement with this accuracy
can only be made with an electronic distance meter. The working path must
be entered on the computer front panel to allow calculation of extinction
and visual range.
The receiver computer provides three analog outputs which are
available to data loggers. The first two outputs can be user defined with
the Al and A2 switches on the computer front panel. The third analog
output is dedicated to a signal called the toggle. A brief description
of the analog signals is presented below:
Al Switch
Al Switch
Position
C
B
VR
Units
Raw Reading (counts)
Extinction (km"1)
Visual Range (km)
0-10 Volt Range
Reoresents
0 - 1000 Counts
0.000 - 1.000 km'1
0 - 1000 km
The Al switch position also determines the value shown on the
receiver computer front panel display.
A2 Switch
A2 Switch
Position
SO
CR
Units
Standard Deviation
(counts)
Raw Reading (counts)
0-10 Volt Range
Reoresents
0 - 100 Counts
0 - 1000 Counts
The A2 value is not available for display on the receiver front
panel.
-------
Togqle
The toggle signal indicates that the receiver computer has made a
valid reading. Under normal operation, the toggle signal will change
state each time a new valid reading is made (i.e., low to high, or high
to low).
Toggle Signal Analog Output
Low Approx. 2.5 volts
High Approx. 10 volts
The toggle state is also displayed on the receiver computer front panel
with an LED indicator light (light on - high).
The 0-10 volt OC, individually grounded, analog signals may be
sampled with any high impedance, single-ended, or differential input data
logger. Connector configurations are shown in Section 7.0, Figure 7-13.
When the receiver is used in the cycled mode, the analog signals
representing the readings are held constant and available to the data
logger until the next reading update.
-------
3.0 SITING CRITERIA
The fundamental requirement for operation of the LPV-2 transmissometer
is a clear, unobstructed line-of-sight between the transmitter and receiver.
When siting the transmissometer, the objectives of the monitoring program
and the requirements and limitations of the instrument should be considered.
3.1 General Siting Criteria
The following general siting criteria should be considered:
o Local or regional monitoring emphasis;
o Representativeness of the sight path to the air mass of concern;
o Isolation from local sources;
o Proximity to seasonal or special use areas;
o Proximity to and desired relationship with other air quality
monitoring systems; and
o Local weather conditions.
3.2 Path Length
When choosing a sight path distance, the expected range of visual air
quality should be considered. As a general guideline, remote areas in
the Western United States will require a separation distance of between 5
and 10 kilometers, while sites in the East will need a sight path of between _
0.5 and 4 kilometers. A usable transmissometer sight path for remote .L,
locations can be calculated if the mean visual range is known, as follows: H
Sight Path Mean Visual Range X 0.033 ?
The working path should be selected carefully when siting a transmissometer f)
in a location with a wide range of visual air quality. pg
H
3.3 Path Height £3
The basic operating assumption of the LPV-2 transmissometer is that, ^
in the absence of atmospheric extinction, the irradiance from the source
decreases inversely as the square of the distance from the transmitter:
-------
ir - V2
Ir - irradiance at some distance r with bex^. » o
I0 « irradiance of source
This premise will be invalid if the transmitted beam is distorted by
refraction due to temperature discontinuities or by surface reflections. To
eliminate these effects, the transmitted light should not intercept or pass
near any surface visible in the detector field of view. If possible, the
sight path should be elevated above the terrain surface and both the receiver
and transmitter should be located at the edge of a drop-off.
The LPV-2 transmissometer has the following optical configuration:
Transmitter: 0.17° uniform portion of beam
1.00° total cone of light
2.30° telescope field of view
Receiver: 0.07° detector acceptance cone
1.30° telescope field of view
The field of view of both transmitter and receiver telescopes in
relation to the terrain surface should be considered when choosing a
sight path. Diagrams of the reticule circles as viewed through the
telescope are presented in Section 7.0, Figure 7-12. Figure 3-1 depicts
acceptable and unacceptable sight paths:
3-la - This figure depicts an ideal sight path where both the
transmitter light beam and the receiver detector cone of
acceptance are well elevated above terrain features.
3-lb - This figure depicts a good sight path. Although the
transmitter beam touches the terrain surface, it does so
at a point well away from the detector cone. The detector
cone is also well elevated above the terrain.
3-lc - In this figure, the transmitter beam passes too close to
the terrain surface. Surface heating may distort the beam.
3-ld - This figure depicts a transmitter beam striking the ground
within the detector cone. Both refraction and reflection of
the beam will occur producing invalid measurements.
Avoid locating the transmissometer sight path over terrain that
will produce a high frequency of temperature inversions, such as bodies
of water.
10
-------
TRANSMITTER
(1° Beam - Solid Line)
3-1A BEST
RECEIVER
(0.07° Detector Cone)
v--
,
3-1B GOOD
Receiver Detector Cone-'-:
.?evat?.d Above Terrain ':-.
^Transmitter beam very close
::';; ground for long distance.
v v'.v'..', - V'.- -*:»' <' .{-^
3-1D UNACCEPTABLE
gi^iS^^^?^^^^
vV'f,. Transmitter beam touches ground within detector field of view.:'.\!.';";;.'..:'
Figure 3-1. Sight Path Examples.
11
-------
3.4 Other Technical and Logistic Considerations
Additional technical siting considerations include:
o Power
o Ground Stability - Mounting piers should be as stable and free
of movement as possible.
o Radio Frequency Interference - The low power CMOS circuitry used
in both components is sensitive to strong radio signals. Avoid
siting very close to broadcast antennas or repeaters.
o Data logger requirements
Logistic siting considerations include:
o Installation access
o Servicing access
o Proximity to servicing personnel
o Vandalism
o Beam Intrusion
12
-------
4.0 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
V/5
An LPV-2 transmlssometer visibility monitoring system configuration Ti
for remote, unattended operation will require a stable mounting platform, ^
adequate sheltering, and a reliable power supply. A diagram of a typical m
installation is presented in Figure 4-1. «j£
4.1 Instrument Mounting ^
Transmitter and receiver telescope alignment is critical for proper ^
operation of the system. The small angle of the transmitter light used P"
for monitoring (0.17°), and the very small angle of acceptance of the £"
receiver detector (0.07°) require mounting platforms that are not **
susceptible to movement due to differential thermal expansion, slippage, ZZ!
or vibration. Receiver mounting is more critical than transmitter mounting. Q
^
A massive concrete pier, or rock, should be used to support the
mounting posts. Soil stability and frost depth should be considered when
locating the pier. The mounting pier should have a large thermal mass and
be designed to avoid movement created by thermal distortion.
Alti-azimuth bases are available that allow precise positioning of
the transmitter and receiver telescopes. They should be designed to
minimize movement due to thermal expansion or contraction.
4.2 Sheltering
The LPV-2 transmissometer requires sheltering to protect the optics
and electronics, to house support equipment, and to shelter the operator
during servicing. Because transmissometer components will operate at
ambient temperatures, climate-controlled shelters are not necessary. The
type of shelter will depend on the local weather conditions and site
logistics. Shelters can range from small environmental enclosures to full-
size instrument shelters. Considerations for sheltering system components
may include:
- Weather conditions
- Shelters aesthetics
- Sealed well against precipitation and dust
- Vandal 1sm
- Access for installation
- Adequate room for support equipment
- Adequate space for operator movement
- Future additions of instrumentation
Two instrument-related requirements should be accommodated: 1) The
mounting post should be isolated from shelter vibrations and movement,
and 2) transmittance at 550 nm for all windows must be known to within +
0.1%.
13
-------
Receiver Station
Data Logger
Receiver Computer
Detector Head
Receiver Telescope
Alti Azimuth Base
Rubber Boot.
1 Window
- -v Assembly
Substantial
Mounting
Post
«: it
Substantial Concrete Pier
Transmitter Station
Hood
Post Isolated from
Shelter Vibration
Hood
Light Output (1° Beam)
"Window Assembly
Transmitter
Control Box
Power Supply
'Alti-
cimuth
Base
Substantial
Mounting
Post
(Rubber
Boot
Bedrock
Figure 4-1. Transmissometer Shelter Diagrams.
14
-------
4.3 Power Requirements
Both the transmitter and receiver operate from 12 volts DC,
requiring 34 and 5 watts respectively. Any well-filtered, stable power
supply may be used; however, the system lends itself well to battery
operation.
When AC line power is available, the transmitter can be powered from
a deep-cycle battery that is maintained by a surge-protected automatic
charger. The receiver can also operate from the same power supply
configuration.
Solar, or alternative power systems, may also be used. Care must be
taken to adequately size the power supply to accommodate periods of
insufficient sun, and to provide power for selected support equipment.
Both the transmitter and receiver circuitry contain battery-backed
timing circuits to maintain correct system timing in the event of a power
failure. The transmitter is equipped with a supply voltage sensing circuit
which will interrupt operation when the supply voltage is insufficient.
This prevents the transmitter from emitting improperly regulated light and
also protects the power supply. The receiver computer has a self-starting
capability to avoid computer lock-ups during power failures.
15
-------
5.0 SERVICING REQUIREMENTS
Routine servicing -of the Optec LPV-2 transmissometer system can be
performed by trained, non-technical personnel. Servicing tasks can be
separated into four classifications:
WEEKLY SERVICING
- Transmitter and receiver telescope alignment
- Cleaning of transmitter and receiver optical surfaces
MONTHLY SERVICING
- Transmitter and receiver system timing check and reset (if necessary)
- Transmitter lamp status check c/l
m
LAMP REPLACEMENT (500-750 hours use) T&
- Transmitter lamp change at 500 hours for 6-volt lamp supply ^
- Transmitter lamp change at 750 hours for 5- volt lamp supply ^
- Pre- and post -calibration of lamps
YEARLY SERVICING O
- Field technician site visit and/or factory servicing of system _
- Post-calibration of all lamps J2
- Pre- and post -calibration of lamps 2
Field operator Log Sheets should document servicing of the Optec £j)
LPV-2 transmissometer system, as well as for support equipment such as data 5
loggers. It is advisable to design the Log Sheets in a checklist format in m
the order servicing tasks will be performed.
m
Z
C/i
16
-------
6.0 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION
Calibration determines the light output of the transmitter as measured
by its receiver. The LPV-2 transmissometer system must be calibrated as a
unit.
- Transmitter
- Transmitter Control Box
- Receiver Telescope
- Receiver Detector Head
- Receiver Computer
In addition, each lamp will have its own calibration number for use
in the specific transmissometer system. No component of the system,
including lamps, may be interchanged without re-calibration.
Calibration requires moving the transmitter and receiver close enough
together to negate the effects of the atmosphere on the light beam.
Calibration path distances of between 700 to 1300 feet accomplish this as
the table below shows:
Atmospheric Transmittance for Calibration
Paths at Various Extinction Values
Extinction (km"1)
Path Lenath
0
0
0
\
.2
.3
.4
km
km
km
(656
(984
(1312
ft.)
ft.)
ft.)
.01
.998
.997
.996
.02
.996
.994
.992
.03
.994
.991
.988
.04
.992
.988
.984
.05
.990
.985
.980
.06
.998
.982
.976
.07
.980
.970
.961
C/5
The LPV-2 optical/electronic systems are very sensitive to allow 73
operation at long paths with very small signals. To avoid detector overload C
due to light saturation when operating at short distances, precisely machined ;»
aperture rings are used to reduce the light gathering ability of the receiver S
telescope by a known amount. A typical diameter for a calibration aperture ^
would be 11.0 mm. ^
The calibration number is used by the receiver computer to calculate O
extinction. Error in the calibration number will, therefore, affect the ^
accuracy of extinction values. Tests are underway to determine the accuracy E
of the calibration numbers derived under field conditions. 08
I
5
z
17
-------
6.1 Calibration Paths
The calibration path should be chosen carefully with the following
considerations:
- Calibration path approximately 700 to 1300 feet (0.2 to 0.4 km)
- Beam elevated well above heated surface
- No local pollution sources
Stable atmosphere of estimable extinction
The calibration path distance must be measured to an accuracy of 0.1%
which is usually only possible with an electronic distance measuring device.
6.2 Calibration Instrument Configuration
The receiver and transmitter telescopes can be supported by portable
tripods for calibration. A well-charged, deep-cycle battery is required to
power the transmitter because it is operated in the continuous "run" mode.
The following is a list of some of the more important support equipment
needed for calibration:
- Electronic distance meter
- Substantial tripod for receiver telescope
- Regular camera tripod for transmitter
- Two deep-cycle batteries
Transmissometer lamps
- Calibration Log Sheets
Communication radios
A precisely machined lamp housing positions the lamp filament in the
correct optical position. Because of this, it is possible to pre-calibrate
a number of lamps for later use. With a pre-marked calibration path,
experienced technicians can calibrate four lamps in approximately three
hours, including set-up and take-down.
6.3 Calibration Data Collection and Analysis
Calibration readings should be documented on a LPV Calibration Data
Sheet (or equivalent), as shown in Figure 6-1. At least ten one-minute
readings should be taken for each lamp. The mean value of the readings
should be used in the following equation to calculate the calibration
number:
18
-------
L.PV CALIBRATION DATA SHEET
Location:
Instrument ID:
Weather/Conents:.
page 1 of 2
Date:
Ttehnieian:
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaasaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaai
WORKING SETTINGS
Working Path (WP) k» Integration Tie,e: 1 10 30 60
Working Gain (WG) Cycle Ti«e: C 20H 1H 2H 4H
Working Aperture (WA) Al Setting: C B VR
A2 Setting: SD CR
Shelter Windows Transaittances (WT)
Receiver . Transmitter . Previous Calib. Nueber
CALIBRATION SETTINGS
Calib. Path (CP> k» Receiver Through Glass: Y N
Calib. Gain (CG) Transaitter Through Glass: Y N
Calib. Aperture (CA) ee
EXTINCTION CONDITION BEFORE AND AFTER CALIBRATION
TINE Bext TINE Bext
Before: N E After: N £
(H measured or E estimated)
Ataospherlc transitttance at tlae of calibration (T)t.
-(Bext x CP)
(calculate T using e or use Table 5-1)
Figure 6-1. LPV-2 Calibration Data Sheet, Page 1
19
-------
CALIBRATION READINGS
page 2 of 2
Start tie*:
Reading To(|I
(spar* data area)
Reading Toggle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Total
Average (CR)
isaaaaaaa
CALIBRATION NUMBER CALCULATION
Calib.l
2 2
* (CP/UP) i (WG/CG) i (WA/CA) « WT i (1/T) x CR
Not*: codify WT if calibration is don* through a shelter window
a **** a a *»*« a «*>«**>
ADDITIONAL COMMENTS
Figure 6-1. LPV-2 Calibration Data Sheet, Page 2.
20
-------
Calib. # - (CP/WP)2 x (WG/CG) x (WA/CA)2 x WT x (1/T) x CR
where
CP * calibration path length, 0.200 to 0.400 km
WP * working path length, 0.500 to 10.000 km
CG - calibration gain, 100.0 to 999.9 (optimum calibration readings
in 800 to 900 range)
WG - working gain, 100.0 to 999.9
CA - calibration aperture, approximately 11.00 mm
MA * working aperture, approximately 110.00 mm
WT * total shelter(s) window transmittance.
If windows are used on both ends, multiply their
transmittance together. Typical value for two
windows is 0.846.
T * estimated or measured atmospheric transmittance for
calibration path, 0.950 to 0.996 typical
CR - average of 10 readings at the calibration path
The transmissometer calibration number represents the reading in
counts that would be measured if the atmosphere between the transmitter
and receiver allowed 100% light transmission. With the calibration
number dialed-in on the computer front panel, the percent transmission
(%T) is directly calculated by the receiver computer by dividing the
measured reading by the calibration number.
Each lamp will have its own calibration number that must be entered on
the computer front panel when the lamp is put into service. Once a system
is calibrated, no further adjustments to the telescope focus or any other
optical changes can be made or the calibration must be repeated.
The uncertainties associated with calibration are yet to be quantified.
The NPS is currently conducting a comprehensive testing program to quantify
these uncertainties.
21
-------
7.0 DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
Diagrams and schematics that may be helpful in understanding the
LPV-2 transmissometer are presented in this section. Included are:
7-1 General Operating Specifications (Optec, Inc., 1987)
7-2 Transmitter Specifications (Optec, Inc., 1987)
7-3 Receiver Specifications (Optec, Inc., 1987) C/5
7-4 Transmitter Components
7-5 Transmitter Control Box
7-6 Transmitter Lamp Chamber
7-7 Transmitter Functional Diagram (Optec, Inc., 1987)
7-8 Receiver Components
7-9 Receiver Functional Diagram (Optec, Inc., 1987)
7-10 Receiver Signal Processing Waveforms (Optec, Inc., 1987)
7-11 Ten-Minute Integration - Sample (Optec, Inc., 1987)
7-12 Reticule Diagrams
7-13 Connector Configurations
n
C/)
22
-------
EXTINCTION RANGE
.010 TO 1.000 /km
RESOLUTION
ACCURACY
MEASURED
WAVELENGTH
Extinction (B)
Visual Range (VR)
Transmission
Extinction
Filter
OUTPUT, PANEL Al
METER
OUTPUT, REAR
CONNECTOR
POWER SUPPLY
AMBIENT
OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
Al (Extinction)
Al (Visual Range)
Al (Calibration)
A2 (Chart Rec.)
A2 (Std. Oev.)
.001 /km
1 km
V-3%
+/-0.003 /km for 10 km working
path and 0.010 nominal extinction
value
550 +/-2 nm, 10 +/-1 nm bandwith at
1/2 power points
Extinction (/km) to .001
Visual Raage (km) to 1 km
Raw instrument values to .010 V
0 to 10 V, 0.01 V « 0.001/km
0 to 10 V, 0.01 V - 1 km
0 to 10 V raw instrument value
0 to 10 V raw instrument value
Standard deviation (N-l samples)
of the raw 1 minute instrument
values
12 Battery
-20 TO +45 deg. Centigrade
Figure 7-1. General Operating Specifications (Optec, Inc., 1987)
23
-------
TELESCOPE
BEAM
FEEDBACK
FILTER
LAMP
CHOPPER
FREQUENCY
CLOCK
POWER SUPPLY
SIZE
WEIGHT
Field of View
Total Diameter
Used for Routine
Monitoring
Feedback Diameter
Uniformity
Center Wavelength
Bandwidth
Type
Regulation
Life
78.1250 +/--0001 Hz
Cycle times
Lamp-on times
Freq. Tolerance
Voltage, input
Power (lamp off)
Power (lamp on)
Projector
Controller
Projector
Controller
2.3 degrees
1 degree, projected cone of light
0.17 degree center portion of beam
denoted by reticule circle
0.17 degree as referenced to the
projected cone and centered within
the 1 degree cone
5% over 1 degree cone
1% over 0.17 deg. center cone
550 +/-2 nm
10 +/-1 nm
6 volt, 15 watt special prefocused
tungsten filament lamp mounted in
machined base
constant to +/-l-5%
500 hrs. continuous at 6.0 volts
20 minutes, 1, 2, and 4 hours
2, 16, 32, 64 minutes and continuous
78.125 ± .0004 Hz (70°F)
10.2 to 15 volts DC
0.12 watt at 12.5 volt input
34 watts at 12.5 volt input
18 x 4 x 6 inches (LxWxH)
9.5 x 5.4 x 1.9 inches
4 Ib.
2 Ib.
Figure 7-2. Transmitter Specifications (Optec, Inc., 1987)
24
-------
TELESCOPE
Field of View
Detector Acceptance
Cone
Clear Aperture
Focal Length
Lens
PHOTOMETER
HEAD
OET/
ELECTROMETER
BANDPASS
AMPLIFIER
A/0 INPUT
AMP
SIGNAL GAIN
CONTROL
COMPUTER
Detector
Detector NEP
Active 01a.
Filter
Type
Gain
Bandwidth
Noise
Gain T-C
Center Frequency
Q
Gain
Bandwidth
Gain T-C
Turns
Linearity
Accuracy
Processor
Memory
I/O
Clock Speed
Buss Type
A/D
D/A
1.3 degrees
0.07 degrees
110.00 mm
629 mm
coated cemented achromat
silicon PIN photod lode
8 x 10E-16 W/ Hz
0.75 mm
550 nm with 10 nm bandwidth
current-to-voltage
4xlOE9
DC to 500 Hz
5 mv p-o DC to 500 Hz
0.02X/C0
78.125 +/-0.100 Hz
32
30
1 to 1000 Hz
0.005X/C0
10
0.25X
0.5X
NSC800. Z-80 8-bit CMOS
32K RAM. 32K ROM all CMOS
60 lines total
4 Mhz
NS CIM-BUS, Euro-card connectors
12-bit. SOuS conversion all CMOS
12-bit. 0 - 10 V output, 2-channel,
CMOS
OPERATING
SYSTEM AND
PROGRAM
Custom version of RTL (relocatable threaded language)
a variation of FORTH resident on ROM
INPUT CHANNELS POWER
GAIN
Al
A2
CYCLE TIME
INTEGRATION TIME
PATH LENGTH
CALIB. CONSTANT
DISPLAY
POWER SUPPLY
SIZE
WEIGHT
Al
0V
OR
TOG
Input Voltage
Input Current
Output Voltages
Telescope
Computer
Photometer Head
Telescope
Computer
Photometer Head
On-off toggle switch
10-turn pot with digital readout
3-pos. switch (C.B.VR)
2-pos. switch (SD.CR)
5-pos. switch (C.20M.1H.2H.4H)
4-pos. switch (1.10,30.60 M)
4-d1g1t BCD switch
3-digit BCD switch
3 1/2 digit panel meter
A/0 over voltage. LEO lamp
0/A over range, LED lamp
Changes state after integ., LED lamp
9 - 15 V DC. reverse polarity protected
400 ma at 12.5 V DC input voltage
+5. +15. -15
23 x 5.5 Inches (L x Ola.)
14 x 12 x 9.5 inches (LxWxH)
5 x 2.5 x 3.5 inches (LxWxH)
17 1b.
7 Ib.
2 Ib.
Figure 7-3. Receiver Specifications (Optec, Inc., 1987).
25
-------
Lamp Housing
Access'
Eyepiece
Telescope Tube
Lens Position Screw
(Preset - do not
adjust)
Objective Lens
Eyepiece
Flip Mirror Knob
iXrm
Control Cable
Lamp Housing
Flip Mirror Knob
Lamp Housing Plate
Lamp Socket
(Shown with Lamp
Installed)
Control Cable
Connection
Control Box Access
Control Cable
Connectio
Power Connectio
amp Status LED
Figure 7-4.
Test Switc
(SN 5 and above)
On/Off Switc
Transmitter Components
26
-------
Power Cable
Connection
Control
Cable
Connector
On/Off Switch
Power Cable
Connection
Control
Cable
Connector
Test-
Switch
On/Off Switch
AGC 5 AMP
Fuse
AA Alkaline
Batteries/
/
-r :
Integration Cycle
Settings .Settings
a
O
Lamp Check LED Time Reset Switch
Control Box - Serial Nos. 001-004
ACC 5
Fuse
AM
AA Alkaline
Batteries
Lamp Check LED
Control Box - Serial Nos. 005 and higher
Plate
Figure 7-5. Transmitter Control Box,
27
-------
Flip Mirror Knob
HO.i
-Eyepiece
.Lamp Housing Plate
_Lamp Socket
(Shown with Lamp
Installed)
Control Cable
-Connection
Chopper Blade
Optical Feed Back
Block
Optical Feedback
Re-Amp Circuitry
Lamp
Control Cable
Connector
Figure 7-6. Transmitter Lamp Chamber.
28
-------
roOISNC EYEPIECE
FU.TCR
SUCON DETECTOR
Figure 7-7. Transmitter Functional Diagram (Optec, Inc., 1987)
29
-------
Objective Lens
Thumbscrew
Objective Lens
Telescope Tube
Photometer Cable
Photometer Head
Flip Mirror Knob
"Objective Lens
Assembly
Mounting Plate
Over Voltage (OV)
Indie
Cain Pot-
Toggle Light-
Over Range (ORV
Indicator
Photometer Output
and Power Cable
Connections on Rear
Panel ' "
.. "^ A1 A2
/ I m
c
INTEG.(MIN) CYCLE
IQ 3O ~- 1H
JM " MM /
«H Sff?\ C
On/Off Switch Time Reset Switch
Figure 7-8. Receiver Components.
30
-------
roCUSJNC EYEPIECE
OBJECTIVE LENS
ELECTROMETER
SILICON DETECTOR
COMPUTER
NSC-dOO CPU
64K MEMORY
TL (TORTH) os
A2 CHART *EC.
SYSTEM ON ROM
ALL CMOS
FRONT PANEL
PHASE PULSE
CONT.. 20 WN
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
I9I9I9I9I l?J9
PATH ton CAUB.
BANDPASS AMP
PARALLa I/O
Figure 7-9. Receiver Functional Diagram (Optec, Inc., 1987)
31
-------
LIGHT QUrpUT FROM
TRANSMITTER UNIT
SIGNAL RECEIVED AT
RECEIVER UNIT
SIGNAL * NOISE
OUTPUT FROM
AMPLIFIER
OUTPUT fTROM ZERO
CROSS BETECTOR
PHASE PULSE
CENCRATOR
TYPICAL
PHASE AND
SIGNAL
PROCESSING
MS3 7
u
I 3
- ^
\
LSI 4
12.fl
LAMP DN
SIGNAL SAMPLE
INTERVAL QF
8
0.4
mum
LAMP OFF
SIGNAL SAMPLE
INTERVAL OF
8 READINGS
0.4 us x
FLT Unj-LTLT LTLTLTLr LRJOJIJ" U^JIJIJ" LTLJ1J
rum ariruijirinn ruiruuifuui njuuumruirLTiiuirumnnjir^
iMJifiinjiM^^
00101013
ON
moioio
START OF
8 READINGS
10101010
LAMP OFF
OUCtfltO
START OF
8 REAJJINtiS
LAMP ON
NEW CYCLE
Figure 7-10. Receiver Signal Processing Waveforms (Optec, Inc., 1987)
32
-------
A ten minute reading is the average of 10 one minute readings
3 MIN
LAMP ON
"*
*» 1 xl
*«
*«
»»
1 MIN
*«
^j
^.
xt
*u
3 MIN
LAMP orr
I SEC
S250 samples are taken of the
signal during each 5 second
measuring Interval
s a a a a
S SEC
The fir it second proceeding eoeh
5 second measuring interval is
used to flnd the average phase of
the signal with the Internal clock.
Figure 7-11. Ten-Minute Integration - Sample (Optec, Inc., 1987)
33
-------
Transmitter
Alignment Reticule
The figure below depicts the reticule as viewed through the transmitter eyepiece:
2.3° Telescope Field of View
1° Beam of Transmitted Light
.17° Portion of Beam Used for Routine Monitoring
The circle depicted on the Log Sheet represents the small .17° inner reticule circle.
It is this circle which should remain aligned on the receiver telescope for correct
instrument operation.
Receiver
Alignment Reticule
The figure below depicts the reticule as viewed through the receiver eyepiece.
1.3° Telescope Field of View
.07° Detector Field of View
The circle depicted on the Log Sheet represents the small .07° inner reticule circle.
It is this circle which should remain aligned on the transmitter for correct
instrument operation.
Figure 7-12. Reticule Diagrams.
34
-------
Receiver computer
Output Connector
Pin No. Function Wire Color
1 AlSwitchableto: Yellow
Raw Reading, Bixror V«
2 A2Switchableto: White
Raw Reading, Std. Deviation
3 Toggle Switch Orange
4 A1 Return Green
5 A2 Return Black
6 Toggle Ground Brown
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Bare
Power Connector
Pin No. Function Win Color
1 Not Used
2 +12 Volt DC Black (Ribbed)
3 -12 Volt DC Black
4 Not Used
Figure 7-13. Connector Configurations.
35
-------
8.0 NFS TRANSMISSOMETER OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS
A number of LPV-2 transmissometers are currently operating in
the NPS Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis and IMPROVE programs.
These transmissometers operate according to the following specifications:
PATH LENGTH
- Acadia National Park, Maine: 3.67 km
* Badlands National Park, N. Dakota: 4.15 km
- Canyonlands National Park, Utah: 6.43 km
- Glacier National Park, Montana: 5.28 km
- Grand Canyon National Park, Arizona: 5.79 km
- Petrified Forest National Park, Arizona: 5.94 km _
- Pinnacles National Monument, California: 4.80 km *-
- Rocky Mountain National Park, Colorado: 5.27 km !*
- San Gorgonio Wilderness, California: 4.10 km
- Shenandoah National Park, Virginia: 0.68 km H
- Voyageurs National Park, Minnesota: 1.68 km 55
>
SYSTEM TIMING Z
Transmitter
- Cycle mode, 1-hour interval, 16-minute duration
Receiver
- Cycle mode, 1-hour interval, 10-minute duration
HR;MI;SEC _ Action
02:00:00 Transmitter lamp turns on
02:03:00 Receiver begins 10-minute average reading
02:13:20 Receiver finishes reading, updates display and
changes toggle state
02:16:00 Transmitter lamp turns off
Sequence repeats hourly -g
m
DATA COLLECTION
1. One 10-minute averaged extinction measurement (km"1) per hour.
Al switch setting: B 2
2. The last raw reading of 10-minute average (counts) each hour. jr
A2 switch setting: CR £*
3. Hourly air temperature (°F). tJ
4. Hourly relative humidity (0-100%).
-------
SERVICING
1. Seven-to-ten day interval - routine servicing of both stations
2. Monthly interval - system timing checks
3. Four-month interval - transmitter lamp changes by field operators
4. Yearly - site visit by field technician. Post-calibration and
replacement of system with pre-calibrated unit.
CALIBRATION
1. Calibration path distance: 900 feet
2. Calibration aperture: 11.05 mm
3. Calibration readings: 800 to 900 count range
4. Number of readings: minimum of 10 within + 2 counts of average
37
-------
9.0 REFERENCES
Air Resource Specialists, Inc., 1988, Transmissometer System Field
Operator's Manual. Prepared in partial fulfillment of National
Park Service Contract CX-0001-7-0010.
Optec, Inc., 1988, Lono Path Visibility Transmissometer Version 2.
Technical Manual for Theory of Operation and Operating Procedures,
Optec, Inc., May.
Additional Reading
Malm, W., G. Persha, R. Tree, H. Iyer, E. Law-Evans, 1988, The Relative
Accuracy of Transmissometer Derived Extinction Coefficients. Paper
to be presented at the 81st Annual Conference of the Air Pollution
Control Association (APCA), Dallas, Texas, June.
99
m
Tl
m
33
m
n
m
c/5
38
-------
Appendix C
Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis Using
Automatic Camera Systems - Standard Operating
Procedures and Quality Assurance Document
-------
Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis
Using Automatic Camera Systems
Standard Operating Procedures and
Quality Assurance Document
Prepared by:
AIR RESOURCE SPECIALISTS, INC.
May 1988
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section . Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1
2.0 MEASUREMENT METHODS AND INSTRUMENTATION 3
3.0 FIELD COORDINATION 6
3.1 Routine Operation 6
3.1.1 Camera - Routine Operations 6
3.2 Training 6
3.3 Quality Assurance 7
3.3.1 Field Quality Assurance 7
3.3.2 Corrective Action 10
4.0 DATA LOGGING AND EDITING 11
4.1 Field Documentation 11
4.2 Internal Documentation 11
4.3 Quality Assurance 25
4.3.1 Film Purcnasing, Handling and Processing
Quality Assurance Procedures 25
5.0 DATA REDUCTION 28
5.1 Theoretical Considerations of Horizon/Sky
Contrast Measurements 28
5.2 Slide Densitometry 36
6.0 REPORTING AND ARCHIVING 45
6.1 Quarterly Data Report Products 45
6.1.1 Seasonal Summary Plot 45
6.1.2 Daily SVR Plots by Month 48
6.1.3 Cumulative Frequency Statistics Table . 48
6.1.4 Qualitative Slide Code Summary 48
6.2 Archive 48
6.2.1 Slide Archive 48
6.2.2 Data Archive 52
7.0 REFERENCES 53
APPENDIX A A-l
APPENDIX 8 B-l
-------
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
1-1 Major Steps in the Data Collection, Handling, and
Analysis of Photographic Data 2
3-1 Visibility Status Assessment Sheet for a Contax
Automatic Camera System 9
4-1 Site Film Master Log 12
4-2 Site Operation Problem Documentation Sheet 15
4-3 Photographic Monitoring Network Quality Assessment
Log 19
4-4 Visibility Slide Codes Used to Characterize Target,
Sky, and Haze Conditions 21
4-5 Visibility Network Slide Coding Log 22
5-1 Cumulative Frequency of SVR That Corresponds to
Contrast Measurements of Four Different Grand Canyon
Teleradiometer Targets. Figure 5-la Shows the
Distribution of SVR With Correct CQs While Figure
5-lb Shows the Effect of Increasing the Inherent
Contrast of the Red Butte Target From -0.87 to -0.60 33
5-2 Error Associated With Calculating Extinction From a
Single Contrast Measurement of a 50 km Target as a
Function of Aerosol Extinction and Inherent Contrast
Measured on a Rayleigh Day. The Scattering Angle
Between Sun and Observer in Figure 5-2a is 158° (back-
scatter), and in Figure 5-2b it is 27° (forward scat-
tering). From Malm and Tombach (1986) 35
5-3 Portion of a .SLD Seasonal Contrast Slide Scanning
Results File 42
5-4 Portion of a .SVR Slide Derived Seasonal Standard
Visual Range Results File 44
6-1 Seasonal Summary Plot 46
6-2 Example Monthly Plots of Daily Mean, Maximum, and
Minimum SVR Values 49
6-3 Example Cumulative Frequency Statistics Table ... 50
6-4 Example Qualitative Slide Code Analysis 51
-------
LIST OF TABLES
Table . Page
2-1 Equipment and Siting Protocols for Photographic
Visibility Monitoring 4
3-1 Automatic Camera System Field Quality Assurance
Procedures 8
5-1 Summary of Assumptions, Advantages, and Disadvantages
of Various Techniques for Determining Inherent
Contrast 31
5-2 Slide Scanning Oensitometer "Slide Scanner" Specifi-
cations 37
5-3 Statistics, Regression Results, and Correlations
Between Teleradiometer and Slide Radiance Ratios. . 39
-------
FORWARD
This report is produced annually or more frequently if required to
include revisions and additions to standard operating and quality assurance
procedures. The report release date should be considered when using the
information provided herein.
-------
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Documenting visibility events and trends is an important aspect of
evaluating existing or potential impairment in class I and other visi-
bility sensitive areas. Many of these areas afforded protection by the
Clean Air Act (1977) are remote. In many instances, commercial power is
not available, manpower is limited, and access is difficult. An auto-
matic camera visibility monitoring station is an effective and economical
way to address these specialized monitoring needs.
An automatic camera visibility monitoring station takes 35mm slides
of a selected view any selected number of times a day. These photographs
provide a permanent visual record of visibility events, and quantitative
visibility measurements such as standard visual range can be estimated
from the slides.
This document outlines the data collection, analysis, and quality
assurance procedures commonly applied in automatic camera visibility
monitoring networks. Figure 1-1 is a flow diagram that highlights the
major steps in the data collection, handling, and analysis procedures.
In-depth discussions of theoretical and practical monitoring and analysis
techniques and considerations are also provided.
-------
MOCtSSCO
a IOCS tCTUNKO
AIMS cwcxn
m MMMcto
WO ICVIQCO
UTUMOUS
SI IOCS
niwm
Figure 1-1.
Major Steps in the Data Collection, Handling, and
Analysis of Photographic Data.
-------
2.0 MEASUREMENT METHODS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Automatic camera systems are an integral part of the visibility
monitoring program. The*day-to-day variations in visual air quality
captured on 35mm color slides can be used to:
- Document how vistas appear under various measured conditions.
- Qualitatively record the frequency that various conditions occur--
e.g., incidence of uniform haze, layered haze, or weather events.
- Provide a quality assurance reference for collected measurements.
- Serve as a method to estimate the electro-optical properties of
the atmosphere (if appropriate teleradiometric visibility targets
are in view).
- Support color and human perception research.
- Provide quality media for visually presenting program goals,
objectives, and results to decision makers and the public.
The specifications for a remote, automatic 35mm camera systems are
detailed in Table 2-1. Although a variety of configurations currently
exist in the field, an example camera system is now available through Air
Resource Specialists, Inc., and meets all of the above criteria. The
system includes:
- Contax 167MT camera with autowinder and data back
- 135mm lens with UV filter
- Programmable camera timer (Model 103) and cabling .
- Environmental enclosure with sunshield and internal locks
- Quick-release camera mount
- Mounting post (single- or double ended)
- Documentation chart
- Instruction manuals and example forms
- Lens cleaning supplies
- Batteries
-------
Table 2-1
Equipment and Siting Protocols for
Photographic Visibility Monitoring
Automatic 35mm photographic monitoring equipment will be used to
collect optical data for the calculation of standard visual range and the
visual characterization of regional haze. Target/sky horizon contrast
measured by microdensitometry of 35mm color slides will be the primary
electro-optical measurement. To achieve these goals, the following
equipment and siting criteria must be met:
Equipment
1. Rugged, reliable 35mm camera body with automatic film winder. The
camera's automatic exposure meter must be designed so that it is on
only during the actual time of exposure and not continuously operating,
2. 135mm lens with UV filter.
3. Oataback that will imprint the day and time the exposure was taken
on the film.
4. Battery-powered programmable timer that will trigger the camera at
least three times a day.
5. The complete system must be able to operate within the ambient
temperature range of -10°F to 130°F.
6. The complete system must be able to be housed in a small stand-
alone environmental enclosure.
7. The system must be able to operate unattended for at least 10 days.
Siting Criteria
1. The monitoring location should be reasonably accessible and secure
year round.
2. The view must contain at least one horizon visibility target with
the following characteristics:
o targe - Subtend at least 0.1 degrees of solid angle (i.e.,
approximately 201 of the size of the full moon).
o Easily identifiable on topographic maps of the area.
o Dark - Preferably covered with coniferous vegetation.
o Distance - Preferably in the range of 601 to 90S of the mean
visual range for the monitoring site.
-------
Table 2-1 (cont.)
o Elevation Angle - The site and target should be approximately
the same elevation. The observer-target elevation angle
should be within +1°.
o The observer-target sight path should not be affected by local
sources of visual air pollution.
o The target should be selected to be as free of snow during the
winter months as possible.
3. Where possible, the target should be selected within the unit of
interest (e.g., within a class I area). If the target is outside of
the unit, as large a portion of the observer-target sight path as
possible should be within the unit. If views do not contain targets
that meet the above requirements, then a view outside of the unit
boundary that contains a good visibility target must be chosen.
-------
3.0 FIELD COORDINATION
Field coordination tasks include routine operation and maintenance,
standard operating procedures, training and quality assurance. The
effective performance of each of these tasks is the key to quality data
collection. Each field-related task is discussed in detail in the
following subsections.
3.1 Routine Operation
Agency personnel generally serve as the site operators and are
responsible for the routine operation of cameras and related data col-
lection equipment at the sites. Effective, two-way communication between
Air Resource Specialists (ARS) and the site operators will ensure that
routine operations proceed smoothly. Routine operations criteria for
camera systems are outlined below.
3.1.1 Camera - Routine Operations
Automatic cameras will take three photographs a day at 0900, 1200,
and 1500 local time. Kodachrome ASA 25 color slide film will be used at
the site. This film was chosen for its fine grain and excellent color
reproduction qualities. For consistency, all film will De developed at
the Los Angeles Kodak laboratory. Photographs will be taken using the
automatic exposure capabilities of the camera (aperture priority -
preferably at a f8.0 setting).
Operators will visit the site a minimum of once every 10 days to
change the film and service the camera system. A full explanation of
the operator's duties are presented in Section 3.3.1, Quality Assurance.
The detailed procedures for handling the film and processed slides are
explained in Sections 4.0 and 5.0.
3.2 Training
Training of site operators by ARS staff is encouraged. Trained
operators consistently yield higher quality data products. As part of
the site installation, ARS'-s field staff will conduct hands-on training
of field operators on all equipment present at the site. Best attempts
will be made to train at least two operators at each site, one of whom
will be permanent staff. Training will include:
Monitoring Program Overview and Goals
Instrument Operations
Quality Assurance
Preventive Maintenance
Trouble Shooting
-------
If additional or refresher operator training is required at a
specific site, Air Resource Specialists' staff will work with the agency
and the site operator to schedule and provide the appropriate training.
3.3 Quality Assurance
Field quality assurance is necessary for precise, accurate, valid
and complete data. Well-designed and regularly-scheduled quality control
procedures will be implemented to assess the quality of each step of the
operation. Effective quality control locates and corrects problems quickly.
The visibility monitoring field quality assurance program will
consist of: operational, checks, preventive maintenance, and data
control to be carried out by site operators on a routine basis.
Inconsistencies identified by the quality assurance procedures will
initiate corrective actions. The following subsections describe the
quality assurance procedures and corrective action plans to be aoplied.
3.3.1 Field Quality Assurance
Site operators will service the camera approximately every 10 days
to change film, checx the performance of the cameras, clean system
components and perform scheduled, preventive maintenance. Site operators
will be fully trained and supplied with all necessary materials.
The Automatic 35mm Camera System User's Manual contains standard
operating and quality assurance procedures and will be provided to each
site (see Appendix A). These written procedures provide step-by-step
instructions for regular maintenance, standard settings, camera cleaning
and servicing. The detailed procedures described in the manuals win not
be repeated in this section; however, the steps are summarized in Table 3-1.
During each routine site visit, the operator will document maintenance
performed and note all discrepancies on the "Visibility Status Assessment
Sheet." The information on the Status Assessment Sheet for a Contax system
is provided as Figure 3-1. The completed sheets will be mailed with each
roll of film. If discrepancies or operator comments on the sheets indicate
that further action 1s necessary, immediate corrective action will be taken.
Identification and documentation of the film rolls is essential.
The field-related aspects of the film documentation procedures are fully
described in Section 4.0 (Data Logging and Editing).
-------
Table 3-1
Automatic Camera System Field Quality Assurance Procedures
procedure
Erequency
Regular Maintenance
o General site/system inspection
o Remove camera
o Remove film (fill out ID label)
o Inspect film compartment
o Load new film
o Inspect and clean camera lens
o Inspect and clean box window
o Check batteries
o Check databack
o Photograph film documentation board
o Check camera settings
o Replace and align camera
o Check timer settings
o Complete Visibility Monitoring Status
Assessment Sheet
o Close and lock camera shelter
o Mail film and Status Assessment Sheet
to ARS
Scheduled Maintenance
o Battery changes
camera and databack
winder
- timer
o Full System
Unscheduled Maintenance
Every 10 Days
Scheduled as below or as
noted by the site operator,
Once a year
Every 6 months
Every 6 months
Every 2 years
As required
If a problem is noted, the operator:
calls ARS
- a replacement camera/timer system
is express mailed to the site by ARS
- the site operator replaces the
system and returns the malfunctioning
unit to ARS
- ARS diagnoses the problem and effects repairs
-------
AUTOMATIC CAMERA
VISIBILITY MONITORING STATUS / ASSESSMENT SHEET
Tatty's
TVm.
Ttmptntun.
0«*cnb* Qcrwral
WMffwr CondMona:
%CXmdCov«r.
G
a
YES NO
G G MenNortng targ*t'
G G CammtoundlnprepvcondWon
a c
a a
a a
l«manawwid0Mrc*Mn
OoeuRMnman PhnograpA
G
G
G STTPNOS
wongor
not
A8AOM
JO
2B
OW M»
o*(OM»« Av»(CMa>
40
XI
A
r r»^»y TIMg/QATE*
G C*m««tgnm«ricwma
COMMENTS / ACTION TAKEN
/ Al
inc
1901
Ferr Co** Cotorooo 40325
20^-404.7941
Figure 3-1."
Visibility Status Assessment Sheet for a Contax Automatic
Camera System.
-------
Throughout the monitoring effort, close personal communications
will be maintained between the contractor and site operators. Operators
will be encouraged to call if they have any questions or problems. Many
problems can be fully resolved over the phone.
3.3.2 Corrective Action
Two types of corrective action will be considered if monitoring
problems are detected or reported:
1. Immediate corrective action to correct or repair non-conforming
equipment or procedures; and
2. long-term corrective action taken to eliminate causes of non-
conformance.
Immediate Corrective Action
Immediate corrective action will depend upon the specific problem
and the type of instrument. Typically, a problem will arise in the
field that the field operator cannot solve. The operator will phone ARS
and discuss the problem with appropriate staff (e.g., field specialist or
photograpnic data coordinator). An attempt will be made to diagnose the
problem and suggest specific corrective action.
If an equipment problem persists, corrective action would depend on
the instrument configuration:
o Camera System - When a camera-related problem is identified, a
backup camera/timer system will be shipped to the site as quickly
as possible. Site operators will exchange the equipment and will
ship the malfunctioning unit to ARS for evaluation and repair.
Long-Term Corrective Action
Long-term corrective action will include detailed evaluation of
systematic problems and development of a well planned, thoroughly documented
corrective action plan, including procedures which can be used to identify
and eliminate problems. Long-term corrective action of operational
procedures can usually be handled through a written revision of SOPs and
incorporation of the procedural changes in training programs.
10
-------
4.0 DATA LOGGING AND EDITING
The logging and editing of film includes a series of steps. The
contractor will coordinate the logging and editing process from field
operator logging procedures to final editing. Effective quality assurance
of the data will be of primary importance throughout the logging and
editing procedures. These procedures have been developed by ARS and are
currently in use.
4.1 Field Documentation
After loading each roll of film, the site operator will fill out a
film canister label and attached it to the film canister. Information
on the label includes:
o Site abbreviation
o Roll number
o Date and time on
o Date and time off
o Film emulsion number
The operator will take a picture of the photo documentation board
on the first exposure of each roll. The board contains the following
information:
Monitoring site identification
Date
Time
Film roll number (numbers are consecutive)
Each camera is also equipped with a databack that records the date
and time on the lower right corner of each slide.
When the operator returns to remove the film, he will complete the
information on the canister label, place the film in a padded envelope,
and mail it, along with the Status Assessment Sheet, as soon as possible
to ARS via first class mail.
4.2 Internal Documentation
Master Log
Film that arrives from the field will be immediately recorded on a
site specific Master Log according to the roll number and the time period
that the film documents. An example of a site Master Log is provided in
Figure 4-1. The following items will be maintained on each site Master Log
11
-------
S
S
1
!M»*«1f
~:ONIMHS
*
"* y*
s
If
S3
w
Jf
s
M*
»
u
a
* S
» Q
M«!
a
* 3
3 a
* *
« X
«<»
a -
.- %
||
i.
n
m
i
sr
* 1
« 'j
I
1
4
1
1
t
I
r
1
f
1
>
1
~
!
|
1
1
)
!
1
!
!
1
1
\
1
1
1
(/I
VI
I
01
12
-------
1. Location Name - Four-character site abbreviation code.
2. Roll Number - The roll number denoted on the film canister
label. If a difference exists between the roll number
received and the roll number that follows sequentially,
reference to the on and off dates of the roll is made. If
roll numbering errors occur, the operator will be contacted
for correction.
3. Log - The receipt of a Status Assessment Sheet with the film
roll is noted.
4. Sent to Process - The date the film is mailed to the LA Kodak
processing lab. If film is lost in shipping, this date will
help to initiate tracing procedures.
5. Mailer Number - Each Kodak mailer in which an individual roll
of film is mailed has a Kodak mailer number. This number is
recorded in the event film is lost during processing.
6. Emulsion Number - The Kodak emulsion number denoted on the film
canister label is recorded to track the response characteristics
of each batch of Kodak film.
7. Back From Process - The date the slides are returned to ARS.
8. Slide Numbers - After editing procedures are completed, the
beginning and ending slide numbers of the edited set will be
recorded.
9. Number Good (#6) - The number of valid slides (slides that
appear usable for quantitative analysis). This number does not
include snow-covered targets, weather-obscured targets, or
slides that are outside acceptable Rayleigh range.
10. Number Received (*R) - The number of slides taken between the
given dates and times for the film roll.
11. Number Possible (IP) - The total possible number of slides
that could have been taken between the given dates and times
for the film roll.
12. Date and Time Logged - The on/off dates and times entered by
the operator on the film canister label will be recorded when
the film is first received at ARS. In the event the film is
later lost, or no databack information is recorded on the
processed slides, this information will be very useful.
13. Correspondence - All written correspondence and telephone
conversations will be referenced and dated. Actual-letters
and telephone documentation notes will accompany the Master
Log for complete reference.
13
-------
14. Problems - Any equipment, operator, or pertinent problems
associated with a given roll of film or the time period in
which it was taken. Problems that have been addressed are
noted on the .Master Log and internally documented with a "Site
Operation Problem Documentation" (Figure 4-2) for further
reference.
15. Special Photos - All supplemental visibility photos will be
noted with their corresponding slide numbers. If interesting
conditions appear in any group of slides, they will also be
noted corresponding with the roll in which they exist.
16. Equipment Change - If a camera, timer, batteries, or any piece
of support equipment is changed or altered, it will be noted
(with a date), corresponding to the date and roll in which the
change occurred.
17. Supplies Mailed - Any time batteries, film, or any other
supplies are mailed to a site, a note will be made as to what
was sent and the date it was mailed.
Film Processing
After each roll of film received from the field has been identified
and recorded on the Master Log, it will be placed in an individual 35mm
Kodak film mailer. Each mailer has a specific ID number that will be
recorded on the site Master Log. The site abbreviation and film roll
number will be placed on the mailer for future identification. These
identification measures will track each roll individually, allowing
identification even if the field operator forgets to photograph the
documentation board. Film mailers will be snipped via UPS to the Kodak
Los Angeles processing lab two times a week.
Within 10 to 12 days, the processed film will be returned by UPS to ARS,
If film is not returned within fifteen days, the Los Angeles processing lab
will be called to verify the arrival and completion of processing. A trace
will be made on the film shipment if any discrepancies in shipping/receiving
dates are discovered.
Slide Check In, Arrangement, Preliminary Review
The receipt of the developed slides from Kodak will be recorded in
the site Master Log.
14
-------
Inc
1901 Sharp torn Oiw*
SumE
Fort Co**. Cotorooo
SITE OPERATION PROBLEM DOCUMENTATION SITE
DATE
CONTACT: _ PHI:
PROBLEM DETECTION S DESCRIPTION:
POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS:
CORRECTIVE ACTION TAKEN:
FOLLOW UP: YES NO DATE
INITIALS
TELEDOC: BY: TO: DATE
COMMENTS:
EQUIPMENT SHIPPED: TO ARRIVE
PROBLEM SOLVED:
ROLL * CHECKS OUT OK DATE: BY:
COMMENTS:
CC:
Figure 4-2. Site Operation Problem Documentation Sheet.
15
-------
PROBLEM SUMMARY
DATA:
ROLL *S AFFECTEO: _ DATES
* OF INVALID SLIDES: SLIDE #5:.
COMMENTS:
EQUIPMENT:
RECEIVEO:_
T-STSO:
RESULTS: REPAIRS
REPAIRS MADE:
COMMENTS:
PROBLEM A
FOLLQW-'JP ACTION
Figure 4-2. Continued
16
-------
Processed slides will be first checked for extraneous photos:
o Only slides that represent the standard date and time sequence
of a given target, or were taken purposely for documentation or
as a supplemental visibility documentation will be kept.
o Any blank slides preceding or following the normal date/time
sequence will be discarded.
Documentation and target photos will be arranged in polyethylene
sheets by date and time. Each protector sheet holds 15 slides (5 rows
of 3 slides each). Each row represents the 0900, 1200, and 1500 photos
for one day. The documentation board photograph will be placed in the
upper left corner of the protector sheet beginning each roll of film.
Slide numbering, Verification, and Filing
Slides will be initially reviewed to verify that the vista alignment
is correct, the databack date and time is recorded on the film, the slides
are arranged in proper order, and that no exposure inconsistencies exist.
Any discrepancies will be documented by site and roll number on the Master
Log and corrective action initiated. Following the initial verification of
slide arrangement, each slide will be numbered sequentially and stamped with
the four-letter site code. The slide set will be placed in a manila folaer
labeled with site abbreviation, roll number, and slide numbers.
Each set of slides will be checked one more time by the slide operations
supervisor. At this quality control point, all slides will be checked and
all log entries verified. If problems are noted, the slide operations
supervisor will initiate corrective action procedures that include:
1. Master Log checked to verify that the problem has not already
been addressed.
2. Previous slides reviewed to identify symptoms that may pin-point
a problem.
3. The photo log or status/assessment sheet reviewed for any
appropriate field operator comments.
4. If no previous corrective action has been taken by the field
personnel or ARS quality control personnel, the field operator
w-111 be called to further identify the malfunction or discrepancy.
A telephone document memo or Site Operation Problem Documentation
will be written as a permanent record of the conversation.
5. Immediate or long term corrective action will be taken to correct
the malfunction and/or discrepancy. A Photographic Monitoring
Network Quality Assessment Log (Figure 4-3) will be mailed to the
site. All problems and directed actions will be documented. The
field operator will document the date of correction and what was
done, and return a copy of the log to ARS.
17
-------
6. All corrective actions will be recorded on the site Master Log
and Operation Problem Documentation for future reference. All
documentation relating to the corrective action will be placed
in the site location file with the Master Log.
7. Photos taken following the date of correction will be checked
immediately to verify that proper adjustments were made.
The next step in the film logging and editing process will be the
determination of the number of photographs that appear usable for quanti-
tative slide scanning. Photographs will initially be considered valid for
quantitative analyses except for:
o Supplemental visibility photos.
o Out-of-alignment photos; e.g., the target is not in the picture.
o Blank photos
o Extremely under or overexposed photos
o Out-of-focus photos; distinct feature cannot be identified.
o Photos taken through a fogged or icy shelter window.
The number of valid slides, that appear usable for quantitative
analysis, is recorded in the #S column on the Master Log. The final
number of slides usable for quantitative analysis (SVR calculations) is
determined after slide coding and scanning are completed.
The actual number of slides taken between the given dates and times
for a film roll is recorded in the #R column of the Master Log.
The total number of observations that could have been taken between
the given dates and times for a film roll is documented in the #P column
of the Master Log.
The number of received slides (R) for each roll recorded on the
Master Log will be totaled to determine the number of observations
collected for the season. The total possible observations (cases) for a
season is determined by considering the number of days in the season and
the number of observations a day. A resulting, seasonal percentage of
collection efficiency is calculated, for example:
265 slides available for the summer season * 962
92 days x 3 photos a day possible
The resulting seasonal percentage will be recorded in the upper left
corner of the Master Log.
Film roll folders will be filed by season, and retrieved at the end
of a season for coding and quantitative analysis.
18
-------
PHOTOGRAPHIC MONITORING NETWORK
QUALITY ASSESSMENT LOG
Silt:
Date:
Operator:
ACTON ITEM
PtiOl
RknUDW
Ag
Pho«U9
DocurfMmoQf)
Chut
flOU*
Apcnura
ASASciong
Exootur*
conxwiMoon
B«unw
OataBKK
wino^«|
CamcrMi)
Tim«r<«)
Atbta^MV^M^
M^nrriww
AIOK
PROBLEM OCSCMPTION
coimecnve ACTIOH TAXKM
OATf
IHTT
Return Y«llow Copy To:
Air Resource
C^fSpeoaiisrs. loc
1901 ShorpPortDrtv*
fan Co** Cofcwodo 30525
Figure 4-3. Photographic Monitoring Network Quality Assessment Log,
19
-------
Slide Coding
Slide coding qualitatively identifies the visibility measurement
related condition of the target and sky and other visibility-related
conditions within the scene. At the completion of each season, slides
from each site will be coded for meteorological and visibility conditions.
These codes, summarized in Figure 4-4, are divided into four primary
categories:
Target Conditions - in the target detector area;
Sky Conditions - in the sky detector area;
Remainder of Sky - conditions in the remainder of sky visible in
the photograph; and
Layered Haze - layered haze conditions that exist, if any.
Each category is represented by a column on the Visibility Network
Slide Coding Log presented in Figure 4-5. The Coding Log will be used
to record specific coding comments for a given film roll during this phase
for processing. Codes are recorded directly on the slides and entered into
the digital database during slide scanning.
Each valid slide will be viewed on a light table with the naked eye
and an eight-power, hand-held lens. The following criteria will be used
to assign a four-digit code for each slide:
A. Target Conditions - The target condition category describes
the visual conditions of the monitoring target in the target
detector area only.
0 In shade - no snow
The normal target surface (i.e., trees, rock, grass, soil,
etc.) is exposed, but shaded by clouds.
1 Direct sun - no snow
The normal target surface (i.e., trees, rock, grass, soil,
etc.) is exposed and in direct sunlight.
2 Snow
The normal target surface is mostly or completely covered
by snow.
20
-------
TAR6ST CONDITIONS
(Target Oetector Area)
0 In snade, no snow
1 Direct sun, no snow
2 Snow on target
3 Target not visible due to
naze
5 Weather obstructing target
8 Incorrect exposure or
not usable for aensitometry
9 No observation
IX DETECTOR AREA
0 No clouds
1 Ctouas
5 Weather obstructing sky
detector area
3 No observation or cannot
be determined
REMAINDER Of SKY
0 No clouds
I Scattered clouds < naif
of sky
2 Overcast > half of sky
5 Weather obstructing scene
9 No observation or cannot
oe determined
HAZ;
0 Non-oercebtible
1 Sround -based layered haze
only
2 Elevated layer only
3 Multiple layers
5 Weather obstructing scene
9 NO observation or cannot
be determined
CODE DESCRIPTION
No snow cover visible in target detector area
and area is in shade due to cloud shadow.
No snow cove' visible in target detector
area and area is generally in sun lignt.
Snow visible in target detector area
regardless of lighting.
Target area not detectable by observer
due to atwosoheric haze (not clouds or
precipitation).
Target area not visible due to clouds or
precipitation.
Incorrect exposure, improper metering, lens
flare, lens (or window) condensation, or
target obstructed by foreign object,
causing slide to be unusable for a valid
densitometry measurement.
No observation taken.
No clouds visible in the sky detector
area.
Clouds visible in the sky detector area.
To be used if target code of 5.
To be used with target code of 9 or if
sky value cannot be determined due to
reasons other than weather obstruction.
No clouds visible anywnere in the sky.
Less than one-naif of the sky has clouds
present.
Greater than one-half of the sky has
clouds present.
To be used with target code of S.
To be used with target code of 9 or If
sky value cannot be determined due to
reasons other than weather obstruction.
NO layered haze boundary (intensity of
coloration edge) is perceptible.
Only a single-layered haze boundary is
perceptible with the haze layer
extending to the surface.
An elevated layer with two boundaries
is present; e.g., horizontal plume.
More than a single ground-based or elevated
layer is present. This can be multiple
ground-based layers or a comoination of both.
Cloud or precipitation are such that determination
of the presence of layered hazes is impossible.
To be used 'with target code of 9 or if a layered
haze value cannot be determined due to reasons
other than weather obstruction/
NOTE: It 1s possible to have a target code of S and still sec a layered haze in the scene.
Figure 4-4.
Visibility Slide Codes Used to Characterize Target, Sky,
and Haze Conditions.
21
-------
Shoip ta*» b*»
f
forr Co** Catenae 00923
VISIBILITY NETWORK
SLIDE COOING LOG
SUE:
SEASON:
ROLL*
SUo* Oat* Tim*
30C |
930
1230
330
T
930
1230
340
j 9:00
1230
330
930
1290
330
930
1230
330
930
! I 1230
i
|
330
930
SOIRS
LH
CO^ft^nAfl*V
I
I
I I
_-J
1230
330
930
1230
330
930
1230
330
930
1230
330
930
i
I
|
I )
|
i
I
I
1230
330
I
CM*
T
SO- Sky m Omeor ASM
RS - A«nacKMr <* Sky
2.13 «t?1>
Figure 4-5. Visibility Network Slide Coding Log.
22
-------
3 Target not visible due to haze
The target is not visible due to factors other than those
listed in defined codes.
4 (not currently used)
5 Weather obstructing target detector area
The target is not visible due to obstruction by weather
such as clouds, fog, rain, snow, blowing dust, or other
readily identifiable wind or moisture-related phenomena.
6 (not currently used)
7 (not currently used)
8 Incorrect exposure or not usable for densitometry
The slide is unusable for a valid densitometry measurement
due to incorrect exposure, improper metering, lens flare,
lens (or window) condensation, or target obstructed by a
foreign object.
9 No observations
8. Sky in Detector Area - This category describes the visual
conditions of the sky in the sky detector area only.
0 No clouds
No clouds are visible in the sky detector area.
1 Clouds
A cloud or clouds are in the detector area.
2 (not currently used)
3 (not currently used)
4 (not currently used)
5 Weather obstructing sky detector area
The sky detector area is not visible due to obstruction
by weather such as clouds, fog, rain, snow, blowing dust,
or other easily identifiable wind or moisture-related
phenomena.
6 (not currently used)
7 (not currently used)
8 (not currently used)
9 No observation or cannot be determined
To be used with target code or when a sky value cannot
be determined due to reasons other than weather obstruction.
23
-------
C. Remainder of Sky - this category describes the cloud condi-
tions in the entire portion of the sky visible on the slide.
Only distinguishable, opaque cloud types are considered; thin
cirrus clouds-are not coded.
0 No clouds
The sky is completely free of clouds or the existence of
clouds cannot be determined due to obscuring haze.
1 Scattered clouds < half of sky
Less than half of the sky visible is covered with clouds.
2 Overcast > half of sky
More than half of the sky visible is covered with clouds.
3 (not currently used)
4 (not currently used)
5 Weather obstructing scene
None of the sky are.a is visible due to obstruction by
weather such as clouds, fog, rain, snow, blowing dust, or
other easily distinguishable wind or moisture related
phenomena.
6 (not currently used)
7 (not currently used)
8 (not currently used)
9 To be used with target code of 9 or if a sky value cannot
be determined due to reasons other than weather obstruction.
0. Layered Haze - This category describes the type of layered
haze visible anywhere on the slide.
0 Non-perceptible
No haze layer with defined boundaries is visible on the
slide.
1 Ground-based layer only
Ground-based layered haze is classified as a haze layer
having an defined upper boundary, which is visible on the
slide. The lower boundary is the ground.
2 Elevated layer only
An elevated, layered haze is classified as a haze having a
defined upper and lower boundary, with the lower boundary
not being the ground.
3 Multiple layers
More than one ground-based and/or elevated haze is visible
in the slide.
-------
4 (not currently used)
5 Weather obstructing scene
No haze layers are detected due to obstruction by weather
phenomena such as clouds, fog, rain, snow, blowing dust,
or other easily identifiable wind or moisture-related
phenomena.
6 (not currently used)
7 (not currently used)
8 (not currently used)
9 To be used with target code of 9 or if a sky value cannot
be determined due to reasons other than weather obstruction.
Completed Slide Coding Logs for each film roll will be stored with
the slides in the designated film roll file folder. Slide codes will be
entered into the slide database during slide scanning.
4.3 Quality Assurance
The quality of photographic material is subject to deviation in
various forms. Throughout the purchasing, handling, and processing of film,
care must be taken to maintain the highest possible quality standards.
Through the observance of certain controls, near maximum quality results
may be expected from photographic materials.
4.3.1 Film Purchasing, Handling, and Processing Quality Assurance
Procedures
Quality assurance in purchasing, handling, and processing of
visibility monitoring film necessitates the procedures outlined below:
I. Film Purchase
A. Buy cases of film directly from Kodak or through a direct Kodak
distributor. All film in the cases must be from the same
emulsion number.
B. Store all film in a low-humidity freezer.
C. Pull five rolls of film from the batch for permanent storage.
This film archive will be used if further analysis of the emulsion
characteristics is required.
D. Separate a number of rolls from the batch for quality assurance
testing (see Field Procedures and Quality Assurance Tests
discussions).
25
-------
II. Field Proceaures
A. Enough film will be shipped to each site to cover two seasons of
monitoring.
B. All film will have the same emulsion number.
C. All film will be shipped in a labeled film storage box to allow
for convenient separate storage at the site.
D. Film in the film storage box will be sealed in a zip-lock freezer
bag with desiccant.
E. Two control rolls of film, pre-exposed with a grey scale and color
bar, will be included in each film storage box. These rolls will
be clearly labeled so that they can not be inadvertently used. A
control roll will be returned to ARS at the end of each season
with the last roll of film taken during the season. At ARS, the
control roll will again be exposed with a grey scale and color
bar. After processing, the two grey scales and color bars will
be compared to evaluate the potential effects of film storage and
transport (See Quality Assurance Tests discussions).
F. Film instructions will be issued to each site to keep the film
frozen or at least refrigerated until use.
G. No film should be stored in the camera shelters.
H. Individual rolls of film will be tracked by emulsion number and
roll number as entered by the operator on the film canister label.
I. Each camera box will have a maximum temperature recording thermo-
meter. At each film change, the maximum temperature should be read,
written on the Status Assessment Sheet, and the thermometer reset.
J. Field operators should mail exposed film immediately to ARS.
III. Quality Assurance (QA) Tests
A. Environmental Conditions - Field Storage Test
Two control rolls will be sent with each two seasons shipment of
film to each site. The, control rolls must be stored under condi-
tions identical to the-rest of the film for the site. At the end
of each season a control roll will be returned to ARS. The
following outline details the QA test.
- The beginning of the film will be exposed with a grey scale
and color bar at ARS.
- Two rolls of the film will be mailed to each site with each
two season's supply of film.
26
-------
- The film will be pre-numbered and clearly labeled so that the
site operators will not inadvertently use the film.
- The control rolls will be stored under the same conditions
as the rest of the film.
- At the end of each season, the operator will mail a control
roll to ARS.
- Control rolls received at ARS will be stored in a cool
location until all control rolls for a season are received.
(This usually occurs over a two-week period.) After all rolls
are received, the end of each control roll will be exposed to
a grey scale and color bar.
- The end of a control roll that has been kept in the ARS
freezer since the film was purchased will also be exposed to
a color bar and grey scale to document any variations in grey
scale and color bar exposure due to non-field-related
circumstances.
- The control film will be sent to the I.A. Kodak processing lab,
- When the film is returned from the lab, the grey scale and
color bars will be compared to identify any changes in film
characteristics that could be attributed to how the film was
shipped to and from the site or stored at the site.
B. Film Processing QA
- All film will be processed at the LA Kodak processing lab.
- Approximately 40 rolls of film from each emulsion will be
exposed with a grey scale and color bar.
- A roll of this film will be sent along with each shipment of
film that is sent to the LA Kodak lab for processing.
- The grey scale and color bars will be compared from shipment
to shipment to identify any differences in film characteris-
tics attributed to the shipment of film to the lab or the
variation in processing.
27
-------
5.0 DATA REDUCTION
A primary goal of visibility monitoring is to quantify how well the
image-forming information in a vista is transmitted through the atmosphere
to an observer some distance away. Determining how well information is
transmitted requires an understanding of atmospheric extinction; the
scattering and absorbing properties of the atmosphere that influence the
transmission of light.
Until the recent development of this transmissometer, two primary
operational measurement techniques were available: integrating nephelo-
meters (Charlson et al., 1967) and teleradiometric techniques using
natural targets (Malm and Molenar, 1984 and Johnson et al., 1986).
The approach used to quantify the visual air quality at this site
is the measurement of sky/target contrast from 35mm color slides. These
measurements emulate teleradiometer measurements.
The details of the data reduction techniques to be applied to the
color slides are detailed-in the following subsections.
5.1 Theoretical Considerations of Horizon/Sky Contrast Measurements
Color slides taken with cameras can be analyzed to emulate tele-
radiometer measurements. The following theoretical considerations will
be applied in the data reduction process:
Basic Equations
Slide densitometry methods will be used to measure the sky/natural
target contrast in the 550nm (green) wavelength 35mm color slides. The
550nm wavelength was chosen since it is the most dominant visible wave-
length in the solar spectrum. These measurements will be reduced and
reported as standard visual range (SVR) or extinction values. The
equations and considerations used to calculate SVR and extinction from
the measured sky/target contrast are based on various deviations and
approximations in the literature (Mlddleton, 1958; Malm, 1979; Allard and
Tombach, 1981). The basic equation relating sky and target (horizon)
radiance (as measured by the teleradiometer) and atmospheric extinction is
N
Cr C0I_° exp (-B^r) (5-1)
sNr
where "5"^ is the average extinction coefficient between the observation
point and a target located at a distance r; SNQ and ^ are the sky
radiance at the target and observation point respectively; and Cr and CQ
are the apparent and inherent target contrasts given by:
28
-------
N N
Cr * t r ' s r (5-2)
s"r
.N N
C0 t ° " S ° (5-3)
SN0
where tNQ and tNr are the inherent radiances of the target observed from
distance = 0 and the observation point to target distance r.
Cr is a site specific value related to the characteristics of the
target and to the target distance. To normalize site specific C-
values, a visual range, Vr, can be calculated from the Cr value by
assuming:
1. SNQ » sNr; (the sky radiance at the target and observer are
equal);
2. Fext is the same over the entire distance equal to the visual
range as it is for the sight path r; and
3. CQ is known.
Under these conditions, Equation (5-1) can be solved for TLxt and
related to Vr by:
Vr - 3.912/F^t (5-4)
where:
' ln (5"5)
A problem results when visual ranges, derived from sites at differ-
ent altitudes, are directly compared. Even in a Rayleigh atmosphere,
where only air molecules affect visual range, an observer can see farther
at higher elevations than at sea level. Thus, a standard visual range
(SVR) is calculated to normalize all visual ranges to a Rayleigh scattering
coefficient of 0.01 km "i or an altitude of 1.55 km. SVR is calculated
using:
SVR - 3.912/(Fext -bray * 0.01 km -1) (5-6)
The Rayleigh scattering coefficient, brav, f°r the mean sight path
altitude is subtracted from the calculated extinction coefficient, bext,
and the standard Rayleigh scattering coefficient of 0.01 km"1 is added
back (EPA, 1980).
Standard visual range can be interpreted as the farthest distance
that a large, black target can be seen on the horizon. It is a useful
visibility index that allows for comparison of data taken at various
29
-------
locations. Note that SVR only describes the conditions in the measurec
sight path and does not account for layered haze or other visibility-
related influences in a vista that do not fall within the measured sight
path.
Determining Target Inherent Contrast
Careful approximation of inherent contrast for each target and time
of day that contrast measurements are made is essential. Four primary
methods have been used to approximate CQ:
1. Direct measurement;
2. Calculation from target contrast measurements obtained on near
Rayleigh days;
3. Estimated from SVR cumulative frequency plots; and
4. Extrapolations of CQ from target contrast measurements of the
same target at various distances, or measurement of Cr of a
number of identical collinear targets that are located at
different distances,
Table 5-1 summarizes the advantages and limitations associated with each
technique.
The direct measurement technique requires that radiometric measure-
ments be made within a few meters of the target. At these close distances,
the field of view of the standard monitoring instruments severely limits the
size of the target from which the measurement is made. Consequently, a
successful direct measurement of inherent contrast requires either very
uniform targets, spatially average inherent radiance measurements made from
the face of the target so that the average innerent radiance is comparable
to the teleradiometer's field of view at normal operating distances, or a
specific teleradiometer with a significantly larger field of view. In
practice, it is almost always difficult to achieve the proximity to actual
targets required to make a measurement. Also, the target usually is not
entirely uniform, and it is nearly impossible to make an inherent contrast
measurement that corresponds to the exact field of view of the teleradiometer
at normal operating distances.
The second method of determining C5 from measurements of Cr on clear
days requires an independent measurement to establish that the atmosphere is
essentially free of particles so that only Rayleigh scattering takes place.
If it is assumed that SNQ * sNr, and bext - bray» Ration 5-1 can °e solved
for CQ in terms of C- and bray. A difficulty associated with this technique
is the requirement that a monitoring program must have been operated over an
extended time period in order to be certain that a number of measurements are
made on particle-free days.
A third method to estimate C0 uses the cumulative frequency distri-
butions of SVR. The cumulative frequency technique (CFT) is used to
30
-------
Table 5-1
Summary of Assumptions, Advantages, and Disadvantages of
Techniques for Determining Inherent Contrast
Various
Direct measurement
of Co
Calculation from C, on
Rayieigh clear sky days
Estimation from
cumulative frequency
distribution of SVR
Interpolation from multiple measurements of C
Multiple coilinear
Multiple teleradiometer, targets with single
single target teieradiometer
AsMimptions
1. Uniform target
over large spatial
area
i. ?,» 5,
errors cancel on
near Rayieigh days
1. Lof normal
distribution o/ SVR
2. No local sources of
ir pollution affect-
in« target sight
paths
1. t/VV»tff and J,,t cancel under all atmospheric
loading conditions
2. Uniform target/targets
3. Uniform sight paths
Disadvantages
1. Difficult to mea-
sure same field of
view at various
distances
2. Difficult to get
cioae to must real
targets
1. Atmosphere never
truly free of aenisois
2. Monitoring over
extensive time
period needed to
make a number
of measurements
on Max Rayieigh
days
1. Nonuniform sight
paths
2. Monitoring over
extensive time
period needed to
make a number
of measurements
on near Rayieigh
days
I. Costly, manpower
and time in field
2. Above assumptions
rarely if ever met
1. Very few eolinear
uniform targets hcvin
sane Co
Advantage*
I. Only technique
that is a direct
measurement of
C,
1. Simple data
processing
2. With large data base
technique can be
reiterated to im-
prove estimates of Co
1. Simple data
processing
2. When combined with
Rayieigh estimates.
allows fine tuning of
estimates
1. None
1. For a few specific utat
may be practical and
useful
31
-------
fine-tune C0 values that have been measured or calculated using methods
1 or 2. The use of CFT is best understood by examining log-normal
probability plots of SVR. Figures 5-la and 5-lb are log-normal cumulative
frequency plots of SVR derived from teleradiometer measurements of four
different targets at Grand Canyon during fall 1982 (September, October, and
November). Figure 5-la shows the distribution of SYR with proper C- while
Figure 5-lb shows the effect of choosing the wrong CQ for one target. In
Figure 5-la, with the proper choice of CQ values, the distribution of SVR
corresponding to each target will be similar and converge at 391 km, the
theoretical maximum SVR. Figure 5-lb, on the other hand, shows the effect
of choosing a C0 which is too large. In Figure 5-la, the CQ values for the
Red Butte target are -0.87, -0.87, and -0.87 at 9:00, 12:00 noon, and 15:00
respectively, while in Figure 5-lb the CQ values are -Q.60, -0.60, and -0.60.
Figure 5-lb shows that the SVR calculation with the wrong choice C0 yields a
distribution of SVR which is n'ot physically possible; seventy percent of the
time SVR was greater than the Rayleigh limit of 391 km. As in method 2, this
technique requires monitoring over an extended time period to provide
sufficient data.
The fourth method employs either: 1) simultaneous teleradiometer
measurements of sky-target contrast of a number of targets located at
various distances from the observer, but with the same directional
orientation (same observation zenith and azimuth angles), or 2) simul-
taneous measurements of sky-target contrast of the same target at various
distances. The rationale for making a set of measurements of this type for
the purpose of calculating Cg lies in rearranging Equation 5-1 so that it
fits the form of a straight Tine:
*
In Cr * -Fextr + In (CoL-°) (5-7)
If the natural log of sky-target contrast is plotted as a function of
target distance r, the slope of this line is -b.yt and the intercept is
In (C0 5N0/sNr).
This method has several limitations. First, In (Cr) does not vary
linearly with r because bex^ and sN0/sNr are not constant with distance;
both are a function of observation angle and distance between the observer
and target. Second, targets with nearly the same observation zenith and
azimuth angles that are located at different distances are not commonly
available. Third, it is inconvenient, and many times physically impossible,
to make measurements of the same target at different distances and at the
same angles of observation.
All four of these procedures have been applied to contrast data
gathered in monitoring networks. In most cases method 2 is used to
establish a first approximation for C-, while method 3 is used to refine
the initial CQ estimations. Method 1 and particularly Method 4, although
conceptually sound, have proved to be difficult to employ under "real-world"
conditions.
32
-------
aoor
600
500
4OO
300
ZOO
i 100
* 80
Figure 5-la,
o
I
40
20
GRAND CANYON (FALL 1982}
MT TRUMBULL
- KENORICK
. RED 8UTTE
DESERT VIEW
10 30 9O 99
CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY {%)
Figure 5-lb,
aoo
700i
600
7500:
* 400
tal 300
2
< 200
<2 100
> 80
O
5 to
I «
S 30
20
GRAND CANYON (FALL 1982)
MT TRUMBULL
O - KENOfllCX
0- RED 8UTTE
O 06SERT VIEW
I 10 30 9O 99
CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY
Figure 5-1.
Cumulative Frequency of SVR That Corresponds to Contrast
Measurements of Four Different Grand Canyon Teleradio-
meter Targets. Figure 5-la Shows the Distribution of
SVR With Correct C 's While Figure 5-lb Shows the Effect
of Increasing the Inherent Contrast of the Red Butte
Target From -0.87 to -0.60.
33
-------
At this site, Methods 2 (calculation from near Rayleigh days) and
3 (estimation from cumulative frequency plots), be applied to estimate
inherent contrasts. An annual CQ will be estimated for each time and
target for each site.
Proper site and target selection also reduces the uncertainty in
estimating C- values. The sensitivity of CQ is reduced for dark targets
selected at distances between 60* and 90% of the visual range. By
selecting multiple targets at various distances from the observation
point, SVR values calculated for each target as a function of the
individual target CQs values can be compared to help identify CQ errors.
Consideration of Error
The assumptions required to solve Equation 5-1 for visual range or
be-t are rarely met. Specifically, sN0/sNr is rarely ever equal to one,
and for most natural targets Cg varies with target and sky illumination
conditions. Malm and Tomback (1986) investigated the error in calculated
extinction associated with the uncertainty in SN0/SN_ and C0 under idealized
clear-sky, uniform illumination conditions. Figure 5-2 presents the results
of their investigation for a 50 km target with inherent contrast values on a
Rayleigh day of -1.0, -0.80, and -0.60, as a function of aerosol extinction.
Figure 5-2a shows the expected error in extinction when back scattering
conditions occur (scattering angle 158°). Figure 5-2b shows the expected
error in extinction when forward scattering occurs (scattering angle 27°).
For CQ » -1.0, extinction error is only due to changes in sNQ/.Wr as the
aerosol loading changes. Extinction error curves for CQ * -0.80 and -0.60
show the additional error associated with variations in C0 as a function of
aerosol loading.
The results of this analysis show that, "as bext increases, there
is an Increasing error in CQ and the error in "measured" extinction
increases. The error is most pronounced for "back scatter" conditions
and for targets with a Rayleigh inherent contrast smaller in magnitude
than about -0.80" (Malm and Tombach, 1986).
Malm and Tombach further emphasize that:
o Brightly colored targets should only be used when shaded or
when forward scattering conditions exist.
o Imperfect CQ estimates for targets less than 50 km would yield
higher error than imperfect C0 estimates for targets greater
than 50 km. However, as target distance increases to a point
where apparent contrast measurements of -0.05 occur, the error
in apparent contrast measurements will begin to dominate.
o To minimize CQ and Cr errors, target distances should be kept
between 60S and 901 of the average visual range (U.S. EPA,
1980), and the observation point and target should be at
nearly the same elevation.
34
-------
Figure 5-2a.
0.0 O.OI 007 003 O.O4
ACMsOb unwciCN coiMcifNr no*-1)
O
a
I
i
Figure 5-2b.
Figure 5-2.
Error Associated With Calculating Extinction From a
Single Contrast Measurement of a 50 km Target as a Func-
tion of Aerosol Extinction and Inherent Contrast Measured
on a Rayleigh Day. The Scattering Angle Between Sun and
Observer in Figure 5-2a is 158° (backscatter), and in
Figure 5-2b it is 27° (forward scattering). From Malm
and Tombach (1986).
35
-------
o For other than cloud-free conditions where illumination is
uniform, the non-uniformity in illumination of the target, sky
or cloud behind the target, and sight path increases the
uncertainty in calculated extinction.
This error analysis by Malm and Tombach emphasizes the need to
carefully select visibility monitoring sites and targets, individually
evaluate each visibility measurement and carefully estimate CQ values.
Perfect site and target selection is often difficult. Geography and
operational logistics do not always follow the rules required to minimize
error. The conditions associated with each visibility measurement must
be also be individually considered. The sky and target conditions must
be considered in the analysis routines. However, with the measurement
techniques applied, it is impossible to accurately account for every
variation in target, sky, and sight path illumination. Averaging,
estimating and reporting over longer time periods, such as seasons, may
help compensate for random measurement error.
The best monitoring, analysis, and quality control techniques
available to minimize error will be applied to the collection and
processing of visibility- data in this proposed effort.
5.2 Slide Densitometry
Theoretical System and Processing Considerations
Air Resource Specialists, the National Park Service, and Optec
developed an integrated system to make quantitative measurements of
visibility-related parameters directly from photographic slides. The
slide scanner is a microcomputer-controlled optical densitometer
specifically developed to handle slides. The system is coupled with a
larger data-processing computer. System specifications are detailed in
Table 5-2. The system can make precise readings of slide transmissions.
Most importantly, the scanner can emulate the geometry of the teleradio-
meter and make sky and target slide transmission readings at the same
angular separation as a teleradiometer would directly make readings of
the same vista. The measured sky and target slide transmission readings
can be used to estimate extinction and SVR. The slide scanning densito-
meter and specific analysis techniques are fully discussed in a paper by
Johnson (et al., 1986), and are briefly described below.
The photographic slide is a-transformed representation of a scene's
radiance field at the moment of exposure; the transformation function is
the light response of the film known as the charachertistic curve. At a
later time this transformed radiance field can be regenerated by passing
light through the slide, and slide transmission measurements can be made
by a densitometer.
The immediate output of the slide scanning densitometer is two
slide transmission readings: one of the target and the other of the sky
36
-------
Table 5-2
Slide Scanning Densitometer
"Slide Scanner" Specifications
Scanning Densitometer
Aperture diameter (urn) 100
Minimum scan increment (urn) 2.64
Maximum number of increments 8192
Maximum scan length (mm) 21.6
Maximum number of readings 768
Slide density limit 3.61
Narrow band filters (am) 402,450,500,550,600,630
Cone-response filters Blue, Green, Red
Teleradiometer Simulator
Effective detector diameter (urn) 152
Detector angle (degrees)* 0.065
Sky-target separation 305.2
Sky-target angle (degrees)* 0.342
*Assuming a 135mm lens on the field camera.
-------
immediately above the target. These two values are combined to give
target/sky slide contrast, where C is the target/sky target contrast, Tt
is the target slide transmission, and TS is the sky slide transmission.
C * Tt/Ts - 1 (5-8)
This quantity does not yet relate directly to actual atmospheric or
associated visibility parameters because of the function relating sky
and target radiance (expressed as film exposure) to film density. This
function is the characteristic curve of the film expressed as density vs.
log^g exposure (where exposure » radiance multiplied by time). To
calculate actual target/sky contrast, the above slide transmission values
first must be converted to corresponding density values by using:
D * log10(l/T) (5-9)
where T is a target or sky slide transmission and 0 is the resulting
density. Then, by using the characterisitc curve function, the resulting
slide densities can be converted to actual target/sky contrast using:
C' * loS(°S)/109(Dt) - 1 (5-10)
where C1 is the actual target/sky contrast (the slide contrast C with
effects of the film response removed), and g is the film response
function that converts absolute slide density to the logarithm of film
exposure.
Even though only relative sky and target radiances can be calcu-
lated (unless the duration of film exposure is known), an absolute
contrast calculation is still possible because of the ratio of radiances
in Equation 5-10. This also means that shifts in the film speed (hori-
zontal translations of the characteristic curve) due to variations in
emulsion sensitivity or processing do not affect the calculation of
target/sky contrast. However, changes in the slope of this function can
affect the calculation. Once target/sky contrast is calculated, standard
teleradiometric data-processing procedures can convert these values to
standard visual range or extinction.
System performance of the slide scanning densitometer relative to
simultaneous teleradiometer measurements was evaluated by Johnson.
Several statistical analyses on up to 1441 data pairs were performed
including correlation, linear regression, average bias and difference
calculations, and cumulative frequency distribution comparisons. Absolute
densitometer precision was very good. Accuracy and precision in estimating
target/sky contrast and standard visual range from photographic slides,
when compared to simultaneous teleradiometer measurements, were also high
and peaked when middle-range targets, around 50 km, were used. Imperfectly
quantified nonlinearities in the film characteristic curve caused a small
reduction in accuracy when using near or distant targets. Table 5-3
presents a summary of the analysis results.
38
-------
I
Urt
ft «/»
S5
4) 41
<- O
«
o
«*»
**
< c
l/> 01
-«- «
S X
« *J
W 41
i/) ea
« o -
ceo
« u
« ~ 8
0 3 «
« * to
to O «
I a
e iT
a
e w
« O to
e «
to 9
Z*J
to e u
to to a
« 1
« e
1- -
O
* w» » W* O <* ^»
^ « 5. 5 S S S
^ " e ft
O W IN
« » w«
e P^
O
Shcnanilo
J
«
H
O
e
e
J 3 J
s « I 1 1 s
# = ^
to
c
^
0
8
^ U
^ ^5
s e «.
* «
to
= II
5-«:
.* *0 *
n M 3
i -
.3 to
H ^ a
^> e
1 «?
i -»«
s£*l=
to *M
« u M
». M e
« ^» ^
x a
*a ++ a,
m ** *
to W
3 I «
O -^ .
.S^ !
? ?!
< z n
39
-------
Referring to Table 5-3, at all locations the means of the tele-
radiometer and slide radiance ratios were very close, with Shenandoah
having the largest difference. Correlation between the radiance ratios
was greater than 0.88 in all cases and reached as high as 0.97 for
Joshua Tree. Rz (variance explained) was very high in all cases, ranging
from 0.78 to 0.95; this reflected the high correlation between the
independent and dependent variables, good system precision, and the
overall adequacy of the statistical model.
In addition, judging from the regression coefficient, intercept and
regression plots, system accuracy was also very good, although the slide
ratios were slightly lower than simultaneous teleradiometer ratios.
Since Johnson's work was completed, identical tests performed on
simultaneous slide and teleradiometer data sets from the Pacific North-
west yielded similar results (Air Resource Specialists, 1985). Overall
research indicates that 35mm cameras taking color photographs are an
acceptable technique for simulating relative teleradiometer radiance
measurements. Slide-derived measurements accurately emulate teleradio-
meter measurements.
Slide Scanning
At the end of each season, slides will be quantitatively scanned.
All scanning will be performed by slide scanning technicians under the
direction of the Photographic Data Coordinator. ARS has over four year's
experience in the quality assured operation and maintenance of the slide
scanner.
Operational slide scanning procedures are listed below:
o Calibration - At four-hour intervals, the scanner Is cali-
brated against a standard step grey scale slide. The density
of each step of the gray scale is known, as measured by a
standard calibrated densitometer. A direct comparison can be
made between the calibrated densitometer and the scanner. A
calibration curve derived from the calibration procedure is
entered into the scanner and is automatically applied to each
measurement. All calibrations are logged in the slide scan-
ning operations log.
o Interactive Scanning - The slide scanning program is completely
interactive and efficient. The slide scanning technician first
visually reviews the slide, checks the slide sequence, checks
the slide codes, and notes any inconsistencies. The technician
next aligns and scans the target/sky contrast for each target on
each slide. The interactive scanner program prompts the operator
for site, date, slide number, time, target, and slide code. The
results of the scan are immediately available to the operator for
review as slide contrast, scene contrast (characteristic curve
corrected), and roughly estimated SVR.
40
-------
The results of the previous scan are also simultaneously
displayed to allow for sequence consistency.
o Data Storage - If the operator chooses to accept the scan, the
data are automatically transferred to the site file on the NPS
computer. A quality assurance code is also calculated and
tagged to the data that includes scan date, time, operator
initials, and edit protect codes.
o Quality Assurance - When all scanning for a site is completed,
the file is reviewed by the Photographic Data Coordinator.
The file must account for each day and time during the season,
whether a slide was taken or not. Five percent of the slides
for each site for each season will be randomly selected and
re-scanned. All scan values must be within +0.02 slide
contrast or a re-scanning of the site will be ordered. All
completed files will be stored as .SLO files. A copy of a
portion of a seasonal .SLO file is provided as Figure 5-3.
Processing
Data will be processed seasonally. Each .SLO file will be run
througn the existing SVR program, a program specifically designed to
perform edit checks and yield SVR or extinction results. The edit
checks and processing considerations applied by the program include:
o File Integrity Check - Each site file is checked to verify
that each date, time, and target is accounted for and that the
range in each file field is acceptable. Each file must contain
all possible dates and times for a season regardless of whether
or not an observation was taken. This approach ensures
consistency in all files.
o Site/Target Specifications - The site and target specifica-
tions, including inherent contrasts, used by the program are
extracted from the master site specifications file.
o Non-Standard Target Illumination - Because estimates of CQ are
made with data from cloud-free days, these estimates take into
account any direct illumination of the target by the sun.
However, it is important to identify when a target is shaded
by clouds. If the target is shaded and a CQ is used that will
account for the target in the sun, the calculated SVR will be
too high. The SVR program will check for visibility slide
codes indicating non standard illumination conditions. If a
target is identified as shaded, a default target-in-shade C0
of -0.95 will be assigned for calculation of SVR.
41
-------
B * TACBaSS . SL-D
I2tlt pm, Friday. January 23, 1937
TACB
TACB
TAGS
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
TACB
1086
1086
1186
1186
1286
1286
1386
1386
I486
1486
1386
1386
1686
1686
1786
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
11111207333
11211202620
12111203463
12211203744
13101208467
13201207036
21110107339
21210103223
22111206331
22211203729
23101208468
23201207360
31 1 10013843
31210011914
32111203341
4184080
4094030
4744080
4814080
3434080
3374080
4324080
4364080
48M080
4784080
3494080
3694080
3804080
3924080
4304080
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.894-0.
.894-0.
.894-0.
.894-0.
.894-0.
,894-0.
.894-0,
.894-0.
.894-0.
.894-0.
.894-0.
.894-0.
.394-0.
.894-0.
.894-0.
043360820201 8 170JD7S8B
04336032020 1900DJD1MD
04386032020 1 937DJD763B
043860S20202000DJOD6CO
043360820202033DJDD6CO
0438608202021 06DJD360F
043860820202 1 47DJD56C9
04386082020221 3DJD36C9
043860820202303DJDD6CO
043860820202330DJD066C
043860820202406DJDE6A3
043860820202426DJDD6CO
043860820202303DJD46EB
043860820202326DJD262F
0438608202023380JDF682
EXPLANATION OF SLIDE FILE <.SU» CHARACTERS
1 2 3 4 3 5 .
1234367390123436789012343678901234367890123436739012343673901234
TACB 78312202110103432 2094092 0.372-0.017360819003116DJDF790
TACB 78312202210103320 2134092 0.872-0.017860819003142DJD3736
TACB 88312203100007049 3634092 '0.8/2-0.017860819003217DJD273C
TACB 88312203200005740 3704092 0.872-0.017860819003242DJD973S
COLUMNS
1-4
3-9
10-11
12-13
14-13
16
17
18-21
22-23
24-23
26-29
30-33
34-39
40-43
46-31
32-37
38-60
61-64
DATA
SITE CODE
SLIDE ID NUMBER
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
TIME CODE (1-9:00, 2«12:00, 3«t3tOO LOCAL TIME)
TARGET CODE
SLIDE METEOROLOGICAL CODE
SLIDE CONTRAST
SCENE CONTRAST
AVERAGE SKY A/D VALUE
CLEAR VALUE
CALIBRATION SLOPE
CALIBRATION INTERCEPT
DATE SLIDE SCANNED
TIME SLIDE SCANNED
OPERATORS INITIALS
16-BIT ERROR CHECK CODE
Figure 5-3.
Portion of a .SID Seasonal Contrast Slide Scanning Re-
sults File.
-------
o Snow-Covered Targets - If a target Is snow-covered, the
apparent contrast measurement is not used to calculate an SVR.
Because extreme variations in CQ occur for snow covered targets,
reasonable estimates of CQ are impossible.
o Obscured Targets - When the target cannot be seen, a contrast
measurement cannot be made, but the reason that the target was
obscured is important. If a monitoring target cannot be seen
due to weather conditions, such as clouds that hide the target,
a SVR is not calculated or estimated. However, if the target is
not visible due to haze that exists between the observer and the
target, the following SVR considerations are applied:
Calculation of a finite SVR for haze-obscured targets is
impossible; however, the SVR must be less than or equal
to the target distance. To consider haze-obscured obser-
vations in the cumulative frequency distribution used to
approximate the seasonal median SVR, a finite SVR value
must be assigned to the haze-obscured observations. The
standard procedure is to assign an SVR equal to the
target distance to any target so obscured-by-haze that
the observer cannot see the target.
The occurrence of haze-obscured targets must be included in
the SVR cumulative frequency distribution, otherwise severe
haze conditions would be ignored and the SVR distribution-
would be biased toward clean values.
o All Other Conditions - Measured contrast values taken under
all other conditions that pass specified edit checks are
considered valid and are used to calculate SVR.
The results of data processing include a SVR data file, a seasonal
summary plot file, and a printed report file. Examples of the SVR data
file is provided as Figure 5-4; report files are discussed in more detail
in Section 6. All results are thoroughly reviewed with project technical
administration. Because all files and programs are easily handled and
efficiently run, any identified inconsistencies in the results can be
readily investigated.
43
-------
6.0 REPORTING AND ARCHIVING
All data and analytical results will be output as a combination of
listings, summaries, discussions, charts and graphs. All results will
present information clearly so that it can be interpreted effectively by
scientific and non-scientific personnel. Collected data will be presented
in quarterly reports. Data presentations vary based on user needs and
preference. The typical or standard data presentations included in the
seasonal reports are presented in the following subsections.
All presentations listed below assume that data will be primarily
summarized as standard visual range.
6.1 Quarterly Data Report Products
The standard seasonal reporting format for collected visibility data
will be the Quarterly Data Report. The report will be delivered 90 days
after the conclusion of the season to which the data pertains. It is assumed
that the visibility monitoring seasons will be defined by the NPS standard:
Winter - December, January, February
Spring - March, April, May
Summer - June, July, August
Fall - September, October, November
The major components of the Quarterly Data Report will be the site
specific seasonal summary plots, daily SVR plots by month, cumulative
frequency analysis statistical summary, and a qualitative slide code
summary. All raw and analyzed data will also be provided on IBM PC-
compatible disks or stored in a user-specified database. All original
slides will be either archived at ARS of delivered quarterly as specified
by the client.
6.1.1 Seasonal Summary Plot
An example Seasonal Summary Plot is provided as Figure 6-1. The
plot includes three data summaries entitled:
Daily Variation of Standard Visual Range
Standard Visual Range Frequency of Occurrence
Data Recovery Statistics.
Daily Variataoos of Standard Visual Range
The daily variation of standard visual range plot displays the daily
geometric mean SVR values for each day of the reporting season. Each bar
represents the daily geometric mean SVR calculated from all observations
taken during that day. The plot includes values calculated for all targets
and times. Gaps in the plot indicate that data were missing or failed the
edit procedures.
45
-------
IRPRGVE Network
Data Analysis Report
Crater Lake National Park, Oregon
Spring Season: (larch 1 to Hay 31, 1987
WWWTTON OF
5
IJ
9
&
?
a
I
s
300-
200-
100.
.. "
-
m
n
_..T..i.fl....l....L U...R.
. r u -u r ]
r. L .v. UL
«J
«
1 10 29 30 10 20
ima tnii
fin rtl
ji...
If
1
30 10
ft ;
.....:!... -1
t t [
20 30
mr
* -
A |
*
e
£ *
* »
>
d r
-I
«
10
9TAMMD VISUW. MMQC nCOUDCY OT trORDCC
rat f> aivot s
or TIC rim,
THE SV* IS L£SS
THW OR COM. TO
THC camcsroono
svt wuc.
190
-rr/irisTrcs
CATEGORY
NW
'(JTi*. P*ISSISL£
OBOPMTIOH8 COLUCTtD
1M THC ' IIC
iao
100
-s
Figure 6-1. Seasonal Summary Plot.
46
-------
Standard Visual Range Frequency of Occurrence
Cumulative frequency distributions are a concise way to represent and
analyze seasonal visibility data. A rank-order cumulative frequency method
(or count method) has been selected to represent the SVR results. Starting
with the Fall 1986 season this method replaces the log-normal cumulative
frequency distribution method for reporting seasonal SYR values.
"Each valid visibility observation of target/sky contrast is converted
to an SVR value. When the target cannot be seen a contrast measurement
cannot be made, but the reason that the target was invisible is important.
If a monitoring target cannot be seen due to weather conditions, such as
clouds that hide the target, a SVR is not calculated or estimated. However,
if the target is not visible due to haze that exists between the observer
and the target, the following SVR considerations are applied.
Calculation of a finite SVR is impossible; however, the SVR must
be less than or equal to the target distance. Since a cumulative
frequency distribution cannot include non-finite SVR values, the
standard NPS procedure is to assign an SVR equal to the target
distance to any target so obscured-by-haze that the observer
cannot see the target.
The occurrences of haze-obscured targets must be included in the SVR
cumulative frequency distribution, otherwise, severe haze conditions would
be ignored and the SVR distribution would be biased toward clean values.
After each individual observation is considered, the SVR data set is
analyzed as a rank-order cumulative frequency distribution. All valid SVR
values for a particular site and season are sorted from low to high. The
minimum SVR possible is the target distance and the theoretical maximum SVR
is 391 km. The 50% value is the median value of the set of valid observa-
tions, half of the ordered values are lower than the 50* value and half of
the values are higher. The 10X level represents that 10% of the valid
observations are lower than or equal to the 101 value. The 90% level rep-
resents that 90% of the valid observations are lower than or equal to the
90% value. The actual 10%, 50%, and 90% values are reported. The SVR values
corresponding to every tenth percent of the data are then plotted on a rank-
order cumulative probability graph. A least squares line is computed to fit
this distribution. The slope of the line is an indication of the variability
of the SVR values calculated for the time period. A steep slope indicates
high variability and a flat slope indicates little variability.
Data Recovery Statistics
The data recovery statistics are presented as numerical and percentage
representations of actual to possible observations:
- Total Possible Observations in the Time Period - Refers to the
number of observations a day times the number of days in the
season. The Total Possible Category is the theoretical maximum
number of observations possible during a season.
47
-------
- Observations Collected - Represents the number of observations
actually collected during a season. The percentage collection
efficiency represents the number of observations as compared
to the total possible observations.
- Observations Usable for SVR Calculations - Is the number of
observations remaining after discounting data that failed edit
or quality control checks. The percentage of Observations
Usable represents the number of usable observations as compared
to the total possible observations.
6.1.2 Daily SVR Plots by Month
The daily SVR plots by month include a graphic representation of
the daily maximum, minimum, and geometric mean SVR. An example plot is
provided as Figure 6-2.
6.1.3 Cumulative Frequency Statistics Table
The Cumulative Frequency Statistics Table summarizes the site
specification, target conditions, SVR statistics, and cumulative frequency
parameters. An example summary table is presented as Figure 6-3. The
slope and intercept data available in the table can be used to determine a
cumulative frequency level for any SVR value. An example calculation is
provided in Appendix B.
6.1.4 Qualitative Slide Code Summary
As described in Section 4.2, each slide will be visually scrutinized
to identify the types of meteorological and haze conditions that exist
in the view. From these codes, a summary of observed haze types will be
compiled for each season. An example summary is provided as Figure 6-4.
When distinct haze layers are visible, they will be identified as ground-
based, elevated or simultaneous ground-based and elevated hazes. All
cases where the target is visible and no distinct haze layer occurred
will be classified as uniform haze. All cases when haze or weather
obscure the target will also be noted.
6.2 Archive
6.2.1 Slide Archive
All slides are stored in non-gassing, polyethylene sheets. All
slides from federal land management agency sites are filed by site,
season, and date (roll). All files are kept alphabetically in standard
file cabinets at ARS. Slides are returned directly to most other clients
such as state agencies.
43
-------
3IERHA ANCHA WILDERNESS, ARIZONA
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE DAILY SUMMARY
a
1
r»:'Tf
.---I
: fc: i.1. ... - -4---*.
";f;f"'':t; i illili-.itil;! '
1 :::::::: 1 ::::::
. . . a. -I. -. _ -L 1
..Tii. f ,i. . i
1 2 3 4 9 7 9 10 11 13 13 14 19 16 17 18 10 20 21 23 23 24 23 20 27 28 29 30 31
JUNE, 1986
SIERRA ANCHA WILDERNESS. ARIZONA
s 1M
* :
^
>
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE DAILY SUMMARY
_-..--:--:- -^--|--- -.I---------------- -- -j-~ --------- | , f .- -L ...
-;-jT;Tl:"-:^;rfrHf-Jrrrij;lllmf!f^rr!|-rt--Tr-"-t]
.TivvA%r-vwAr.r^^^^^^
:::::;.::::::: :.::...
' ::::::::::::::::-::::::::
3 4 9 « 7 t 0 10 11 13 13 1.4 19 la 17 18 10 20 21 22 33 34 29 26 27 28 29 30 31
JULY, 1988
SIERRA ANCHA WILDERNESS. ARIZONA
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE DAILY SUMMARY
1"
w <>
' * i
, - .
l
i
P
-
a
1
--
^
-
> ^
i» ^
3
f
» ^
^» ^
.-
> ^
4
l ^
MB ^
-
9
» ^
«
* «
13
-
-
L
-
^
-
i
V
I
* «
te
^ M
-V
> ^
i«
-
"-*-
.
- -H
^
17
T
* -
*
*
^ «
T
* .
^ «
19
t
- ^
» «
^ ^
20
-y
-j-^
*
31
r
~ ~.
.-.
32
-"-"
~* "\
--
23
--
»** ^
--
24
--
p-_-
--
29
--
__-_-
--
28
--
»~ ""
--
2?
, 1
'-- J.
----
20 20
1r
-V-"-1
p ^ <* ^
30 31
a
>
AUGUST, 1986
«
Figure 6-2. Example Monthly Plots of Daily Mean, Maximum, and Minimum
SVR Values.
-------
Fall 1987 Elevation: 0.60 km
Target
1 TARGET 1
2 TARGET 2
31.5 319 1.950
26.7 323 1.660
A R 0900 1200 1500
2.45 1.022 -0.78 -0.72 -0.72
2.27 1.033 -0.85 -0.74 -0.78
0 The straight-line distance in kilometers from the monitoring site to the target.
Z Azimuth 1n degrees true from the monitoring site to the target.
E Elevation of the target in kilometers.
A Angle of elevation in degrees from the monitoring site to the target.
R Rayleigh coefficient at 550 nanometers for the median site path elevation.
The values following the target geographic statistics are the inherent contrast
values determined for the target(s) at the indicated times.
TARGET CONDITION SIWARY
(Number of occurrences for each condition)
TARGET * 1 2 ALL
Snow covered:
Shaded:
Cloud behind:
Cloud -obscured:
Haze-obscured:
Bad contrast:
Missed readings:
Not usable:
SVR>391:
CR
-------
Qualitative Slid* Analysis
Sierra Ancha, AZ
Summer 1986
Site 4 Target
SIERRA ANCHA
"Mount TurnOul 1"
T1
Summer 86
SIERRA ANCHA
"Aoaene Ridges"
T2
Summer 36
[Total
Month JObser-
! vat-Ion
i
i
JUNE! 89
j
JUL i 87
AUG ! 84
i
i
TOTAL! 260
1(1001)
JUN ! 89
i
i
JUU J 87
AUG i 84
t
TOTAL! 260
Jnooi)
Uniform
Haze
54
57
23
134
(521)
77
75
70
222
(831)
Ground Based
Layered Haze
10
8
*
19
(71)
10
a
3
21
(81)
Layered
Haze
1
0
0
1
(01)
1
0
0
1
Layers
0
0
0
0
(01)
0
0
0
0
(01)
Target
Obseurrod
bv Haze
19
7
41
67
(261)
0
0
0
0
(01)
Target
Obscurred
bv Weather
5
15
19
39
(151)
1
4
11
16
(61)
Figure 6-4. Example Qualitative Slide Code Analysis.
-------
6.2.2 Data Archive
An original and duplicate digital copy of all slide contrast and SVR
data files are kept at ARS. NPS and IMPROVE files are currently being
integrated into a comprehensive visibility database. For other federal
agencies and clients, duplicate IBM, PC-compatible floppy disks or 9-track
ASCII tapes of all data are sent along with the seasonal report.
52
-------
7.0 REFERENCES
Air Resource Specialists, Inc., 1985, "Visibility Monitoring Benefiting
Class I Areas in the Pacific Northwest." Progress report delivered.
to USFS Region 6 under NPS Contract CX-0001-03-0057, Fort Collins,
Colorado.
Allard, D. and I. Tombach, 1981, "The Effects of Non-Standard Conditions
on Visibility Measurement." Atmospheric Environment, 1847-1858.
Charlson, R. J., H. Horvath, and R. F. Pueschel, 1967, "The Direct
Measurement of Atmospheric Light Scattering Coefficient for Studies
of Visibility and Pollution." Atmospheric Environment, 1: 469.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 1980, "Interim Guidance for
Visibility Monitoring." Report EPA-450/2-80-082.
Johnson, C. E., W. C. Malm, 6. Persha, J. V. Molenar, and J. R. Hein,
1985, "Statistical Comparisons Between Teleradiometer-Derived and
Slide Derived Visibility"Parameters." Journal of the Air Pollution
Control Association (JAPCA), 35:1261-126T!
Malm, W. C., 1979, "Considerations in the Measurement of Visibility."
JAPCA, 29:1042-1052.
Malm, W. C., and J. V. Molenar, 1984, "Visibility Measurements in
National Parks in the Western United States." JAPCA 34 (9).
Malm, W. C. and I. Tombach, 1986, "Review of Techniques for Measuring
Atmospheric Extinction." APCA Specialty Conference on Visibility
Protection, Grand Teton National Park, Wyoming.
Middleton, W. E. K, 1958, Vision Through the Atmosphere. University
of Toronto Press, Toronto, Canada.
53
-------
APPENDIX A
Automatic 35mm Camera System User's Manual
A-l
-------
APPENDIX B.
Determination of SVR and Cumulative Frequency
from the Slope and Intercept Available in a
Cumulative Frequency Statistics Table
B-l
-------
DETERMINATION OF SVR AND CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY
FROM THE SLOPE AND INTERCEPT
(Note: The following discussion is only valid for visibility analysis
statistical tables produced by the count method and published
after April 1988.)
The slope and intercept data available on the Cumulative Frequency
Statistics Table may be used to determine an SVR value from any cumula-
tive frequency level, or to determine a cumulative frequency level from
any SVR value. An example table is presented in Figure A-l.
TABLE t I ALL
Points
Slope
Intercept
Correlation
101 Level
501 Level
901 Level
238
2.05
43.93
0.99
52
121
275
238
2.05
43.93
0.99
52
121
275
Figure A-l. Cumulative Frequency Statistics Table.
The slope (2.05) and the intercept (43.93) along with the cumulative
frequency value may be used to calculate any cumulative frequency level
(Q to 1001) or the corresponding SVR value.
To determine the SVR given the slope, intercept, and the cumulative
frequency value, use Equation 1,
SVR » EXP[(SLOPE x CUMF) + In(INTERCEPT)] (1)
where:
CUMF is the cumulative frequency (in decimal);
SLOPE is given in the Cumulative Frequency Statistics Table;
INTERCEPT is given in the Cumulative Frequency Statistics Table; and
SVR is the standard visual range value.
To determine the cumulative frequency level given the SVR and the
slope, intercept and cumulative frequency value, use Equation 2 using
the same variable designation as Equation 1.
CUMF » In(SVR) - In(INTERCEPT) f2)
SLOPE
B-2
-------
Example Calculation 1: using data presented in Figure A-l, apply Equation 1
to find the SVR value for the 255 cumulative frequency value.
SVR » EXP(2.05 x 0.25 + ln(43.93))
SVR - EXP(0.51 + 3.78)
SVR EXP(4.30)
SVR - 73 km
Example Calculation 2: using the data presented in Figure A-l, apply
Equation 2 to find the cumulative frequency value for an SVR of 154.
CUMF - ln(154) - ln(43.931
705
CUMF » 5'04. " 3'78
OS
CUMF * .51
CUMF * 615
3-3
-------
Automatic 35 mm Camera System
User's Manual
-------
INTRODUCTION
Photographs are a quality way to monitor visibility. Fol-
lowing the procedures in this manual will ensure high
quality, consistent visibility monitoring.
This manual supplements, but does not replace the
Contax Equipment Instruction Manuals. Manuals for
each camera component should be read and kept with
your camera log book for easy reference.
CAMERA HARDWARE
Camera: Contax 137MA Quartz
Lens: Yashica 135mm, with UV (haze) filter
Film: Kodachrome2SKM 135-36
Databack: Contax Databack Quartz D-5
Timer: 3-ClockTimer
FORMS AND SUPPLIES
The following items are necessary for continued oper-
ation of this camera system. They may, or may not, be
kept at the camera location:
Log Notebook
Visibility Monitoring Status Assessment Sheets
Spare Batteries:
1 - 9 V Transistor
4-AA
2-1.5 VEPX-76 silver oxide
Padded Mailing Envelopes
Film Cannister Labels
FILM STORAGE
To ensure proper film storage, pack the film inside a
ziploc bag with dessicant, inside a Film Storage Box.
Store the film in this manner until it is used. Place the
film storage box in a refrigerator or preferably a freezer.
If no cooling unit is available, try to store the film in a
cool (less than 70 degrees), dry location.
Keep ail film inside the Film Storage Box until it is used.
If the film is kept in a freezer, allow the film to thaw at
room temperature for 24 hours before loading it in the
visibility camera.
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
Use your Visibility Monitoring Status/Assessment Sheet
every time you perform regular maintenance on the
system. It is an excellent maintenance guide and can
help you identify problems.
1. Inspect interior and exterior of cabinet for damage
or other problems (water leakage, etc.). Inspect out-
side of camera, lens, and window for dirt.
2. Remove camera from box. Disconnect the timer
cable from the camera at the midpoint jack. Remove
the camera body by pushing the quick release lever
on the tripod.
3. Remove exposed film from the camera, and place it
in the plastic cannister supplied with the new film.
Fill out the label provided and attach it to the out-
side of the plastic cannister. The label should con-
tain the following information:
- Monitoring site name or abbreviation
- Roll number
- Date and time of first shot on roll
- Date and time of last shot on roll
- Emulsion number - Expiration date
4. Inspect film compartment for fragments of film. Re-
move these by blowing lightly. DO NOT TOUCH
the film guides or the shutter curtain.
5. Load new roll of film (see p.28 of Contax Instruction
Booklet).
Confirm proper film advance by observing rotation
of film feed indicator during film advance.
6. Inspect camera lens and UV filter for dirt. Clean, if
necessary (see Camera Servicing Section).
7. Check Camera Batteries
Check the batteries by moving main switch to the
battery check position. Note the condition of the
green lamp.
LAMP ON - Battery voltage good
LAMP OFF - Drained, replace batteries
Batteries should last about a year, depending on
sight conditions. Replace as required.
8. Check Data Back day and time.
-------
9. Photograph Documentation Board
The FIRST exposure on EVERY roll must be the
documentation board on the inside of the camera
shelter door. The board must contain:
- Monitoring Site Name or Abbreviation
- Roll Number
-Date
- Time
- Grey Scale
- Color Chart
The board should be photographed in full, uniform
lighting - no shadows or reflections.
A. Fill the view finder of the camera with the board,
allowing only a slight border between the grey
scale and the edge of the frame. You may have
to shift your position slightly to find a spot where
there are no shadows or glare from the board.
The board is mounted with velcro tabs and may
be moved if proper lighting conditions are not
possible with the board mounted on the box.
B. Bring the documentation board into SHARP
focus.
C. Take the exposure.
10. CHECK camera settings for automatic operation:
11
Main Switch Setting On
Aperture Ring
ASA Dial
Exposure Compensation Dial
Shutter Control Dial
Exposure Mode Selector
f8.0
40*
XI
A
S
* - Film remains Kodachrome 25
Replace and Align Camera
A. Mount camera and tripod head onto tripod base.
B. Check cable connections. Timer cable to left
front side of camera and midpoint cable jack.
C. Look through View Finder and align camera with
the vista to be photographed. It is important
that the alignment is constant from one roll of
film to the next. Check:
Horizon is level
Vista is framed the same as previous
alignment
Sun shade is not visible in view finder
Firmly tighten all locking levers on the tripod
head, and recheck alignment.
12. Check timer settings. See Clock Timer Section if
timer must be reset.
13. Complete all items on Visibility Monitoring Status/
Assessment Sheet, insert yellow copy of status
sheet in log book.
14. Remember to bring exposed film and original copy
of Visibility Monitoring Status Assessment/Sheet
back for mailing.
15. Close and lock camera box.
16. Mail film and Visibility Monitoring Status/Assess-
ment Sheet to:
Air Resource Specialists, Inc.
1901 Sharp Point Drive, Suite E
Fort Collins, Colorado 80525
ATTN: Betsy Davis
CAMERA SERVICING
1. Lens
A. Periodically check the camera lens and filter for
excess dust.
B. Use the supplied lens paper, and cleaning
fluid to clean lens.
C. Unscrew the UV filter and clean the lens and
inside surface of the UV filter only if necessary.
D. Fold a piece of lens paper into a size that will
clean the eye-piece. Do not use sharp objects or
Q-tips to clean.
E. Do NOT remove the lens to clean inner surfaces.
2. Film Compartment
A. Before loading new roll of film, check the film
compartment for fragments of film. Remove
these by blowing lightly.
B. Do NOT touch the film guides or the shutter cur-
tain.
3. Camera Batteries
A. Check the batteries by moving main switch to
the battery check position. Note the condition
of the green lamp
LAMP ON - Battery voltage good
LAMP OFF - Drained, replace batteries
B. Batteries should last about a year.
C. The Contax uses four AA (1.5 volt) alkaline bat-
teries. Check Contax Instruction Book (p.12) for
installation instructions.
4. Data Back Batteries The Data Back D-5 uses two 1.5
volt button (EPX-76) batteries. Check Contax Data
Back manual for installation and resetting instruc-
tions. Batteries should last about one year.
-------
THREE CLOCK TIMER
The timer provides a contact closure at up to three
user-selected times per day. The contact closure trips
the Contax camera to take a photograph.
Three individual clocks are incorporated into the timer.
Each clock displays the actual time of day, and each
clock alarm is set for the desired photograph time.
When the alarm time is reached, the clock alarm output
trips a contact closure at the terminal strip on the bot-
tom of the timer. In normal operation, the top clock
alarm time is set for 9:00 (9:00 a.m.), the middle clock
alarm time is set for 12:00 (12 noon), and the bottom
clock alarm time is set for 15:00 (3:00 p.m.).
To Set the Time
1. Slide the SET/ALARM switch to SET/T.
2. Press the HOUR set button once to advance one
hour. Press and hold to advance the hours quickly.
Release at the correct hour.
3. Press the MINUTE set button once to advance the
time one minute. Press and hold to advance quickly.
Release at the correct minute.
4. Slide the SET/ALARM switch to ALARM/ON.
To Set the Alarm
1. Slide the SET/ALARM switch to SET/A. The time dis-
played is the time for which the alarm is presently set.
2. Press MINUTE set and/or HOUR set following the
steps in "To Set the Time" to set the desired alarm
time.
3. Slide the SET/ALARM switch to ALARM/ON to activate
the alarm.
Batteries
There are two types of batteries in the timer, one 9 volt
transistor and one AA battery.
1. The 9 volt battery controls the contact closure signal
to the camera. To change the 9 volt battery, slide
the battery compartment on the rear of the timer
case open. Replace with a good quality alkaline 9
volt transistor battery. This battery is expected to
last six months. When this battery fails, the clocks
will still display the time; however, no photographs
will be taken.
2. One AA battery powers the three clock display. To
change the battery, remove the four phillips-head
screws which are accessible from the back of the
timer. Remove the back cover and replace the bat-
tery, observing the same polarity. The clock display
will appear dim or go blank when this battery is
exhausted.
WIRING THE CAMERA TO THE TIMER
A two screw terminal strip is mounted on the bottom
of the timer. To wire the camera to the timer, connect
the lug ends of the camera remote triggering cord pro-
vided to the terminal strip.
CAMERA OPERATION - PROBLEMS
It is important to read the Contax Instruction Booklet
thoroughly before operating the camera.
Experience has shown that the following camera and
operator problems result in most of the bad photo-
graphs in the network. Page numbers refer to the per-
tinent section in the Contax instruction booklet.
Problems with the Camera: Page
1. Loading Film 28
2. Unloading Film 52
3. Incorrect ASA setting 34
4, F-stop on improper setting 40
5. Weak camera batteries 16
6. Main lamp flashing 64
7. Weak timer batteries s« Three ciock
Timer section
CONTACT US
if any questions or problems arise:
PHONE: Kristi Savig
Air Resource Specialists, Inc.
1901 Sharp Point Drive, Suite E
Fort Collins, Colorado 80525
303 / 224-9300
-------
Appendix O
Transmissometer Systems Field Operator's Manual
-------
TRANSMISSOMETER SYSTEM
FIELD OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Prepared for the
NATIONAL PARK SERVICE
Visibility Monitoring & Data Analysis Program
(NPS Contract CX-000 1 -7-00 1 0)
Prepared by
AIR RESOURCE SPECIALISTS, INC.
August 1988
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section . Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Background 1
1.2 Report Format 3
2.0 INSTRUMENT AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS 4
2.1 Monitoring System Overview 4
2.2 Optec LPV-2 Transmissometer 7
2.2.1 Transmissometer Overview 7
2.2.2 Transmi ssometer Transmitter 8
2.2.3 Transmissometer Receiver 9
2.3 Handar 540A Data Collection Platform 10
2.4 Primeline 6723 Strip Chart Recorder 11
2.5 Handar 435A Temperature/Humidity Sensor .... 12
3.0 SERVICING SCHEDULE AND SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS ... 13
3.1 Servicing Schedules 13
4.0 ROUTINE SERVICING 17
4.1 Receiver and Transmitter - Common Routine
Servicing Tasks 17
4.2 Transmitter Station - Routine Servicing .... 20
4.3 Receiver Station - Routine Servicing 23
5.0 INTERMITTENT SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 28
5.1 Checking and Resetting System Timing 28
5.2 Transmitter Lamp Changes 31
5.3 Strip Chart Servicing 35
5.4 Solar Power System Servicing 35
5.5 AC Power System Servicing 35
5.6 Storage Battery Servicing 36
5.7 Data Collection Platform Antenna Servicing. . . 38
6.0 TROUBLE-SHOOTING 39
6.1 Before Calling for Assistance 39
6.2 Transmitter Trouble-Shoot Ing 40
6.3 Receiver Trouble-Shooting 40
6.4 Strip Chart Trouble-Shooting 41
6.5 DCP Trouble-Shooting 44
6.6 Solar Power System Trouble-Shooting 44
6.7 AC Power System Trouble-Shooting 45
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Cont.
Section , Page
7.0 REPLACING AND SHIPPING INSTRUMENTS 46
7.1 Removing the Transmissometer System 46
7.2 Removing the DCP. . 47
7.3 Removing the Strip Chart Recorder 49
7.4 Removing Air Temperature/Relative Humidity
Sensors 50
7.5 Transmitter Installation 50
7.6 Receiver Installation 51
7.7 OCP Installation 52
7.8 Strip Chart Recorder Installation 53
7.9 Air Temperature/Relative Humidity Sensor
Installation 54
7.10 Packing and Shipping 55
8.0 MONITORING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 57
8.1 Monitoring System Diagrams 57
8.2 Transmitter Component Descriptions 65
8.2.1 Transmitter Telescope 65
8.2.2 Transmitter Control Box 66
8.2.3 Transmitter Cables and Connectors. ... 66
8.3 Receiver Component Descriptions 67
8.3.1 Receiver Computer 67
8.3.2 Receiver Telescope 70
8.4 Terminal Strip and Wiring Descriptions 71
8.5 Strip Chart Component Descriptions 72
8.6 DCP Component Descriptions 74-
8.7 DCP Antenna Component Descriptions 76
8.8 Air Temperature/Relative Humidity Sensor
Description 77
8.9 Solar Power System Component Descriptions ... 78
8.10 AC Line Power System Component Descriptions . . 79
8.11 Storage Battery System Descriptions 80
8.12 Support Equipment Descriptions 81
APPENDIX A Transmissometer Measurements A-l
APPENDIX B Transmissometer Data Examples B-l
APPENDIX C List of Related Reading Material C-l
APPENDIX D Satellite System Information D-l
APPENDIX E Example of a Completed Transmitter Station Log
Sheet E-l
APPENDIX F Example of a Completed Receiver Station Log
Sheet F-l
ii
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Cont.
Section Page
APPENDIX G Transmissometer System Cable and Connector
Description E-l
APPENDIX H Servicing Supply List H-l
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
2-1 Monitoring System Overview 5
2-2 Monitoring Component Placement 6
3-1 Transmissometer Servicing Schedule 14
3-2 Transmitter Station Servicing Tasks 15
3-3 Receiver Station Servicing Tasks 16
4-1 Transmitter Station Log Sheet 18
4-2 Receiver Station Log Sheet 19
5-1 Transmitter Control Box 30
5-2 Transmitter Lamp Chamber 32
5-3 Lamp Use and Calibration Stickers 33
7-1 DCP Transmission Channel Switches 48
8-1 Transmitter Component Diagram 58
8-2 Receiver Component Diagram 59
8-3 Terminal Strip Wiring Diagram 60
8-4 Strip Chart Component Diagram 61
8-5 DCP Logger Component Diagram 62
8-6 DCP Antenna Component Diagram 63
8-7 DCP, Receiver, and Strip Chart Stickers 64
A-l Bex|. vs. Visual Range A-2
B-l Example of Strip Chart Data B-l
B-2 Example of Transmissometer Tracking Plot B-2
111
-------
PREFACE
This manual was prepared in partial fulfillment of the National Park
Service Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis Program (Contract CX-001-
7-0010). The manual presents all information necessary for field
operators to properly operate and maintain transmissometer systems based
on the Optec, Inc., LPV-2 long-range transmissometer. Transmissometers
are a new and evolving technology. As required, this manual will be
updated to reflect changes in instrumentation or operational procedures.
-------
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This manual details field operations and maintenance procedures
required to operate the Optec LPV-2 transmissometer system. The manual is
for use by on-site field operators and contains general and detailed system
descriptions and step-by-step servicing and trouble-shooting procedures.
1.1 Background
Visitor enjoyment of national parks and wildernesses is often
enhanced by the opportunity to clearly see spectacular vistas. In all
areas of the country, clean, clear air is an important aspect of the
quality of life. Many parks and wildernesses are located in pristine areas
where even small amounts of air pollution cause noticeable reductions in
the visual air quality.
Recognizing the importance of visual air quality, Congress highlighted
visibility protection in class I areas as a national goal in the 1977
Amendments to the Clean Air Act. The National Park Service (NPS) air
quality program responded to this congressional mandate by establishing a
Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis Program in 1978.
The monitoring program has three components. The first, view monitoring,
documents the visual impairment of specific, unique vistas under existing air
quality conditions. Another monitoring component measures basic electro-
optical properties of the atmosphere, independent of specific vista charac-
teristics. The third component measures the atmospheric aerosols responsible
for reduced visibility.
The primary view-monitoring technique has been the use of cameras to
qualitatively document visibility conditions of unique vistas. The principle
electro-optical technique has been teleradiometric measurement of natural
-------
targets. The instruments used include several generations of manual and
automatic teleradiometers and camera/slide scanning densitometer systems.
Throughout the eight-year history of the Visibility Monitoring and Data
Analysis Program, the NPS has cooperated with the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA), other federal land management agencies, states, and private
industry to perform monitoring and research aimed at enhancing their ability
to meet national visibility goals. Through these cooperative efforts, the
program has evolved to incorporate improved monitoring and analysis techniques.
As a result of recent analyses and research, certain deficiencies in the
applied electro-optical measurement technologies have been identified.
Specifically, electro-optical techniques applied in the past do not measure
atmospheric extinction with sufficient accuracy to satisfactorily make the
link between particulates and visibility reduction.
The goal to directly and accurately measure atmospheric extinction led
to the development of a long-range transmissometer system. To operationally
apply this system in the pursuit of national visibility goals, the NPS, the
EPA, and other federal land management agencies enhanced their long-standing
cooperative relationships to establish the Interagency Monitoring of Protected
Visibility Environments (IMPROVE) program.
The IMPROVE program and NPS obtained transmissometers (Model IPV-2)
from Optec, Inc., for implementation in selected class I areas. The LPV-2
system directly monitors the light transmission properties of the atmosphere.
The data can be reduced to yield atmospheric extinction or standard visual
range measurements. Field installation of transmissometer systems is being
performed by Air Resource Specialists, Inc. LPV-2 systems have been
successfully operated in class I areas and in other urban and rural areas.
-------
1.2 Report Format
This manual contains the following sections:
2.0 GENERAL INSTRUMENT AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.0 SERVICING SCHEDULE AND SUMMARY REQUIREMENTS
4.0 ROUTINE SERVICING
5.0 INTERMITTENT SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.0 TROUBLE-SHOOTING
7.0 REPLACING AND SHIPPING INSTRUMENTS
8.0 MONITORING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Any questions on instruments and operational procedures should be
directed to:
Roger Tree or
Ivar Rennat
Air Resource Specialists, Inc.
1901 Sharp Point Drive, Suite E
Fort Collins, Colorado 80525
303/484-7941
-------
2.0 INSTRUMENT AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
This section Introduces and describes the operation of Instruments
and support equipment used In the transmissometer visibility monitoring
system. Instrument and support equipment discussed In this section are:
2.1 Monitoring System Overview
2.2 Optec LPV-2 Transmissometer
2.3 Handar 540A Data Collection Platform
2.4 Primeline 6723 Strip Chart Recorder
2.5 Handar 435A Temperature/Humidity Sensor
2.1 Monitoring System Overview
The transmissometer monitoring system collects visibility and
related meteorological data. A long-path transmissometer makes the
visibility measurements and data are collected by a satellite telemetered
data collection platform (DCP). The OCP transmits the data through a
geostationary satellite to a collection facility where it is available for
access. A strip chart recorder provides data collection backup as well as
an on-site visual record of instrument performance for the field operator.
Each component of the transmissometer monitoring system is a
separate functioning unit; however, to obtain high quality data, all
components must work together. Figure 2-1 presents the monitoring system
overview. Figure 2-2 displays instrument and equipment placements within
the transmitter and receiver shelters.
It is important to understand how the transmissometer functions and
what the collected data represent. With a working knowledge of the
system, field operators are better prepared to maintain the instrument,
recognize problems, and reduce down-time. Major components of the
monitoring system are described in the following sections.
-------
SUPPORT
EQUIPMENT
TRANSMITTER
CONTROLLER
TRANSMITTER
(LIGHT SOURCE)
I
LIGHT
ATTENUATED
DUE TO
SCATTER INi
AND
ABSORPTIOI
GOES
SATELLITE
DATA
COLLECTION
PLATFORM
FIELD
AIR TEMPERATURE
AND RELATIVE
HUMIDITY
TERMINAL
BOARD
STRIP CHART
RECORDER
OPERATOR LOG
SHEETS, STRIP
CHARTS, AND
AUTO. CAMERA
FILM AND LOGS
RS
NOAA/
NESS
CONTACT
FIELD
OPERATORS
1
r
SEND
EQUIPMENT
REPLACEMENTS
i
ON-SITE
SERVICE
^
»
SITE VISIT
AND CALIBRATION
REPORTS
i
'
SITE
SPECIFICATION
AND HISTORY
1
^M^
1
J DOWNLINK
WALLOPS ISLAND)
i
r
DATA
DISSEMINATION
FACILITY
I
!*«
»
MODEM
DATA
COLLECTION
|
DAILY
DATA REVIEW
*
APPEND
AND STORE
1
.
DATA EDITING
(SEASONAL)
1
1
1
»-
DATABASE
ARCHIVE
^
ANALYSIS
AND
pFpnoT<;
I
.J
Figure 2-1. Monitoring System Overview
-------
Receiver Station
(6'x 6'x 8')
Strip Chart Recorder
Receiver Computer
Detector Head
Receiver Telescope
Terminal Strip
Deep Cycle
Battery
Rubber Boot.
1 Window
- sAssembly
Sand Filled
Post
Air Temp./Rel.
Humidity Sensor
DCP Antenna
Receive Light (.07°
Detector Cone)
NOTE: Not shown are:
Servicing supplies, shipping case,
solar or A.C. power.
.Shelter Supports
Post Isolated from
Shelter Vibration
Transmitter Station
(3'x3'x4'6")
Hood
Light Output (1° Beam)
NOTE: Not shown are:
Lamp case, servicing supplies,
solar or A.C. power)
Shelter Supports
(if needed) ~~
Roof Hinges
To Side
Transmitter
Control Box
Figure 2-2. Monitoring Component Placement.
-------
2.2 Optec LPV-2 Transmissometer
2.2.1 Transnrissometer Overview
A transmissometer is designed to measure the light transmission properties
of the atmosphere at a specific wavelength (color). It accomplishes this by
measuring the loss in light received from a light source of known intensity, as
the light beam travels a known distance.
An Optec, Inc., LPV-2 transmissometer has two primary components: a
light source (transmitter) and a light detector (receiver). The individually-
housed components are normally separated by a line-of-sight distance of
between 0.5 and 10.0 kilometers. The distance between the transmitter and
receiver is dependent on the expected visual air quality, instrument
performance factors, and physical constraints such as power and servicing
access.
Extinction, or the attenuation of light as it passes through the
atmosphere, is a combination of light loss due to both scattering and
absorption. Transmissometers are the only instruments capable of directly
measuring extinction. The Optec LPV-2 transmissometer measures extinction at
a wavelength of 550 nm (green)--an area of the spectrum where the human eye
is most sensitive.
Transmission measurements can be expressed as extinction or visual range.
A discussion of these terms and visibility theory as it relates to the
transmissometer is presented in Appendix A. Sample data, and a list of
related reading material are included in Appendix B and C respectively.
Additional technical information on the transmissometer can be found in the
Optec LPV-2 Instrument Manual (Optec, Inc., 1987).
-------
2.2.2 Transmissometer Transmitter
The LPV-2 Transmitter emits a uniform, chopped light beam of constant
intensity at regular intervals for a programmed duration.
The transmitter has two components: an electronic control box and a
light source or transmitter. The control box houses most of the instrument
electronics, such as the lamp power supply and controller, the chopper
frequency control, and the internal auto-timer. The transmitter assembly
houses the lamp, chopper, optical feedback detector, and the magnification
and alignment optics. A diagram of the transmitter and description of its
components can be found in Section 8.0 (Figure 8-1).
The transmitter optics perform two functions: 1) they concentrate light
from the 15-watt tungsten filament lamp into a narrow, well-defined uniform
cone, magnifying the beam to the equivalent of a bare 1500-watt lamp, and
2) the optics also allow the operator to precisely aim the light beam at
the receiver.
The intensity of the light emitted from the transmitter is precisely
controlled by an optical feedback system within the lamp chamber. This
system continuously samples a small portion of the outgoing beam and makes
fine adjustments to keep the light output constant. Although the lamp light
is white, only the green (550 nm) portion of the output is monitored and
controlled by the feedback circuitry.
Light emitted from the transmitter is "chopped" into approximately 78
pulses a second by a mechanical spinning disk located in front of the lamp.
The light is chopped to allow the receiver computer to differentiate the lamp
signal from the background or ambient lighting. By using this technique,
the transmissometer can operate continuously, both day and-night.
-------
The timing circuit within the control box is programmed to turn the
transmitter on at regular intervals for a specified duration. The transmitter
is "cycled" to extend lamp life and to reduce power consumption. In a
typical monitoring configuration, the transmitter turns on at the top of
each hour and stays on for 16 minutes. The cycle repeats hourly.
2.2.3 Transmissometer Receiver
The Optec LPV-2 receiver gathers light from the transmitter, converts
it to an electrical signal, calculates results in the desired form, and
outputs the results to both a display and to data loggers.
The receiver is comprised of three components: 1) a long focal-length
telescope, 2) a photodetector/eyepiece assembly, and 3) a low power computer.
A diagram of the receiver and a description of its components can be found in
Section 8.0 (Figure 8-2).
The telescope gathers light from the transmitter and focuses it on a
photodiode housed in the detector head. The photodiode converts the light
energy to an analog electrical signal which is sent to the receiver computer.
The signal can be described as an AC waveform (chopped transmitter light)
carried on a DC voltage (background lighting).
The computer separates the chopped transmitter light from the ambient
background light and "locks-on" to the transmitter frequency. Once "locked-
on" to the frequency, it determines when the light was on and when it was
off (chopped). The receiver circuitry then converts the analog signal into
a digital form.
The computer compares the lamp-on signal with the lamp-off signal
approximately 4000 times (waveforms) a minute. By determining the amount
«
of transmitter light that reaches the receiver, based on an average of
-------
many measurements (waveforms), the effects of turbulence on the light
beam are minimized. The computer then compares the measured transmitter
light with the known (calibrated) transmitter light to calculate the
transmittance of the atmosphere.
When the path distance is supplied (user set), the computer calculates
and expresses visibility measurements in terms of:
1. Raw receiver reading (counts)
2. Extinction (km'1)
3. Visual range (km)
In addition, the receiver outputs a "toggle" signal that changes state
(high to low, or low to high) when a new reading is calculated and output.
A change in the toggle state indicates that a new reading has been made.
Like the transmitter, the receiver is equipped with an eyepiece for
precisely aiming the detector and an internal timer to control the start
and duration of measurements. In a typical monitoring configuration, the
receiver will make a 10-minute averaged reading between 3 and 13 minutes
after the hour (centered within the transmitter "lamp-on" interval).
2.3 Handar 540A Data Collection Platform
The Handar 540A data collection platform (DCP) is a low-power, micro-
processor-based data logger. The DCP samples sensor inputs, such as the
transmissometer extinction signal, at precise intervals as defined by an
internal computer program. Every three hours at a specified time and radio
frequency, the DCP transmits the data it has collected to a geostationary
satellite. The satellite relays the data to a downlink facility where it is
stored and is available for dissemination.
The DCP-transmitted data are collected daily at ARS where the transmis-
someter, air temperature, and relative humidity measurements are checked to
10
-------
verify the instruments are functioning properly.
In addition, ARS monitors DCP operating parameters such as transmission
time, battery voltage, signal strength, and deviation of the transmissions
from the assigned frequency. By closely monitoring instrument and DCP
performance, it is often possible to identify and resolve problems, reducing
down-time.
If the DCP fails and efforts to trouble-shoot the system are not
productive, the strip chart recorder will collect data until a replacement
DCP is installed.
A diagram of the DCP and a description of its features are located in
Section 8.0 (Figure 8-5). Additional technical information can be found in
the Handar 540A Operation and Servicing Manual (Handar, Inc., 1982). Further
information on the satellite data collection system is presented in Appendix D.
2.4 Primeline 6723 Strip Chart Recorder
The Primeline 6723 strip chart recorder serves two functions: 1) it
acts as a backup data logger in the event of a DCP failure, and 2) it
provides the field operator with a visual record of transmissometer
performance.
The strip chart logger is a recording voltmeter that documents trans-
missometer extinction measurements and the toggle signal. Notes written on
the strip chart also provide a useful record of field operator site visits.
Strip chart paper and pens must to be changed at two-month intervals.
Completed and labeled strip charts are normally sent in with exposed film
from automatic camera systems. A diagram of the strip chart and a descrip-
tion of its components is located in Section 8.0 (Figure 8-4), and a sample
section of chart paper is shown in Appendix B. Additional technical and
11
-------
servicing information can be found in the Prime!ine 6723 Instruction Manual
(Soltec, Inc.).
2.5 Handar 435A Temperature/Humidity Sensor.
A Handar 435A sensor measures air temperature and relative humidity.
The sensor is housed in a white, parallel-piate radiation shield mounted on
the outside of the receiver shelter. The sensor is controlled by, and
directly connected to, the DCP. No on-site record of these measurements is
made.
The air temperature and relative humidity measurements are monitored
daily as the DCP-transmitted data are collected.
12
-------
3.0 SERVICING SCHEDULE AND SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS
This section outlines the field operator servicing schedule and
lists servicing tasks required at both the transmitter and receiver
stations.
The objective of field servicing is to assure the collection of high
quality data with minimal loss. This requires the following information
from the field operator Log Sheets:
1. Was the instrument capable of producing high quality data in the
interval between operator servicing visits?
2. Have servicing tasks been performed so that the instrument will
produce high quality data until the next site visit?
3. Have preventative maintenance tasks been performed to minimize
the possibility of downtime?
Prior to servicing, transmissometer alignment and optics must be
checked and the "as found" conditions documented. Log Sheets must be
completed correctly as verification of servicing.
3.1 Servicing Schedules
The transmissometer servicing schedule is presented in Figure 3-1. The
following figures present the suggested order of completing servicing tasks
for both the transmitter station (Figure 3-2) and the receiver transmitter
station (Figure 3-3).
30
m
O
c
3D
m
3
m
z
H
13 (f.
-------
TRANSMISSOMETER SERVICING SCHEDULE
7 to 10 Day Interval
o Complete the servicing tasks listed on the Site Assessment Log Sheets,
o Both the receiver and transmitter shelters must be visited at 7 to
10 day intervals.
Monthly Interval
o At least once a month both the transmitter and receiver system
timing should be checked and reset if necessary.
o The transmitter lamp status LED must be checked at least once a
month.
o Inspect solar panels, batteries, and DCP antenna.
Bi-Monthly Interval
o Strip chart paper and pens should be changed on the first site
visit of every-other month. The chart paper magazine should also
be cleaned at this time.
Four-Month Interval
o Transmitter lamps should be changed every four months. ARS will
notify sites when a lamp change is needed.
Yearly
ARS field technicians will make site visits once a year to exchange
the existing transmissometer system for a serviced system.
o Training of field operators in the servicing and maintenance of the
monitoring system components will take place during yearly ARS
technician visits.
Figure 3-1. Transmissoraeter Servicing Schedule.
14
-------
TRANSMISSOMETER TRANSMITTER STATION
SUMMARY OF SERVICING TASKS
Tasks are listed in the suggested order of completion. For more detailed
instructions, see the following section.
Before Leaving the Office:
1. At least once a month, schedule your servicing trip to be at
the transmitter station while the transmitter is in the "run"
mode to check the lamp status LED and the system timing.
2. If checking the system timing, set your digital watch to the
correct time prior to leaving the office by calling the Bureau
of Standards recording 303/499-7111 (Boulder, CO).
At the Transmitter Station:
1. Complete the general information section and reset the thermometer.
2. Document the initial alignment conditions and/or comment.
3. Make sure the flip mirror is in the correct position.
4. Inspect and document the window cleanliness.
5. Clean the window or comment as necessary.
6. Dust the transmitter lens with canned air.
7. Clean the solar panels, inspect them for damage.
8. Observe and record the transmitter on time.
9. Observe and record the LED status light while transmitter is on.
10. Observe and record the transmitter turn off time.
11. Check supply inventory. Request needed supplies on the Log Sheet.
12. Record any comments on the Log Sheet.
13. Leave a copy of the Log Sheet in the shelter; take the original
back to the office and send to ARS.
14. Double-check the alignment and the flip mirror position before
leaving the shelter.
Back at the Office:
1. Send original Log Sheets from both the receiver and transmitter
to ARS along with film from the auto camera.
2. Call ARS field technicians promptly if a problem or need arises.
Figure 3-2. Transmitter Station Servicing Tasks.
15
-------
TRANSMISSOMETER RECEIVER STATION
SUMMARY OF SERVICING TASKS
Tasks are listed in the suggested order of completion. For more detailed
instructions, see the following section.
Before Leaving the Office:
1. At least once a month, schedule your servicing trip to be at
the receiver station as the computer reading updates (13
minutes past the hour) to check the system timing. The
transmitter off time (16 min. past the hour) can also be
observed and documented from the receiver station.
2. If checking the system timing, set your digital watch to the
correct time prior to leaving the office by calling the Bureau
of Standards recording 303/499-7111 (Boulder, CO).
At the Receiver Station:
1. Complete Log Sheet general info section; reset the thermometer.
2. Record the time and receiver computer reading and toggle state.
3. Record the receiver computer settings.
4. Document the initial alignment conditions and/or comment.
5. Inspect and document the window cleanliness.
6. Clean the window or comment as necessary.
7. Dust the telescope objective lens with canned air.
8. Document the site visit on the strip chart.
9. Change chart paper and pens if necessary and re-document visit.
10. Clean solar panels and inspect for damage.
11. Inspect the antenna for damage or loose mounts.
12. Observe and record the transmitter turn-off time.
13. Observe receiver reading up-date (toggle light change) and
record time.
14. Make final alignment check after reading updates and while
transmitter is still on.
15. Observe transmitter turn-off and record time.
16. Verify the flip mirror is in "run" position.
17. Record the new reading on the Log Sheet.
18. Check supply inventory. Request needed supplies on the Log Sheet.
19. Record any comments on the Log Sheet.
20. Leave a copy of the Log Sheet in the shelter. Take the original
back to the office and send to ARS.
21. Double-check the alignment and the flip mirror position before
leaving shelter.
Back at the Office:
1. Send original Log Sheets from both the receiver and transmitter
shelters to ARS along with film from the auto camera.
2. Call ARS field technicians promptly if a problem or need arises.
Figure 3-3. Receiver Station Servicing Tasks.
16
-------
4.0 ROUTINE SERVICING
This section describes transmissometer monitoring system routine
servicing tasks and Log Sheet entries. Task descriptions are listed in
the order in which they appear on the Operator Log Sheets. Information
or procedures to be followed are described with the appropriate Log Sheet
entry.
Log Sheet entries and general task descriptions common to servicing
of both the transmitter and receiver stations are presented in the
following section. Servicing tasks and Log Sheet entries relating to
only the transmitter or receiver stations follow in separate sections.
Blank operator Log Sheets are shown in Figures 4-1 and 4-2. Examples of
completed Log Sheets are included in the Appendix (E and F).
HAND-HELD RADIO The transmitter circuitry, especially the internal auto-
PRECAUTION timer, can be adversely affected by strong radio signals.
Do not transmit on a hand-held radio within 10 feet of the
transmitter. Avoid aiming the antenna at, or over, the
circuitry. Strong radio signals may reset the internal
auto-timer, resulting in incorrect system timing.
4.1 Receiver and Transmitter - Common Routine Servicing Tasks
The following general information appears on the top of both the
transmitter and receiver Log Sheets.
LOCATION Either the full location name or the four-letter
abbreviation can be used.
DATE Use the standard calendar date, not a Julian date.
TIME Current local time in 12-hour format should be used.
Use Daylight Savings Time when applicable.
OPERATOR(S) Use your full name or first initial and last name.
SHELTER All shelters are equipped with a Brannan max/min
TEMPERATURE thermometer. Temperature readings are used to monitor
the instruments and support equipment.
MAXIMUM The maximum temperature since the last site visit is
TEMPERATURE noted by the bottom of the marker column on the right
side of the thermometer.
17
-------
M Resource
^Specialists. Inc. Location
TRANSMISSOMETER OPERATOR LOG SHEET
TRANSMITTER STATION
Date Time Operator(s)
Shelter Temp. ("F) Max M!n Current.
Describe Weather & Haze Conditons:
ALIGNMENT Mark initial location of light source with a * + ". Align and/or comment as needed.
Initial Comments
o
ROUTINE PROCEDURES
YES NO
D D Alignment corrected
O Q Window clean upon arriving
Q Q Window cleaned (if no, comment)
Q n Solar panels cleaned
O D LampLED"on"; ifyes,callARS(Thischecklsonryvalidduringlamp'on*time.)
O D LamP changed (To be done only on specified dates or upon direction from ARS.) New lamp #
n D Time reset (upon direction of ARS only)
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
Lamp No. In Use: Comments:
Timing Check: Transmitter ON/OFF at (HR:M»N:SEO:
COMMENTS/SUPPLIES NEEDED
Enclose the original of this Log Sheet and send to:
Air Resource Specialists, Inc., 1901 Sharp Point Dr., Suite E, Fort Collins, CO 80525, 303/484-7941
03/88
Figure 4-1. Transmitter Station Log Sheet.
18
-------
Air Resource
(^Specialists. Inc.
Location
TRANSMISSOMETER OPERATOR LOG SHEET
RECEIVER STATION
Date
Time
Shelter Temp. (°F) Max _
Describe Weather & Haze Conditons:
Operator(s)
Min
Current
READINGS
( Align.: Time
Align.: Time
Time Check: Transmitter Light ON/OFF .
. Reading.
Reading _
. Toggle ON/OFF.
Toggle ON/OFF .
Time (HR:MIN:SEO.
Receiver Toggle Chg. ON/OFF .
Time (MR:MIN:SEO
CAL
DIST.
COMPUTER SETTINGS CAIN
A1-C, 8, VR A2-SD, CR INT - 1, 10, 30, 60 Cycle - 4H, 2H, 1H, 20M, 6
ALIGNMENT Mark initial location of light source with a *(". Align and/or comment as needed.
Initial Comments
o
ROUTINE PROCEDURES
YES NO
D D Alignment corrected
CD O Window clean upon arriving
Q d Window cleaned (if no, comment)
Q n Solar panels cleaned
YES NO
D D OV light "on" (if yes, call ARS)
n D Strip chart marked
D D Chart paper O.K.
n D Chart pens O.K.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES (Use only after receiving instructions from ARS)
D D Computer reset
D C3 rime reset
COMMENTS/SUPPLIES NEEDED
Enclose the original of this Log Sheet and send to:
Air Resource Specialists, Inc., 1901 Sharp Point Dr., Suite E, Fort Collins, CO 80525,303/484-7941
03/88
Figure 4-2. Receiver Station Log Sheet.
19
-------
MINIMUM
TEMPERATURE
CURRENT
TEMPERATURE
WEATHER AND
HAZE CONDITIONS
The minimum temperature since the last site visit Is
noted by the bottom of the marker column on the left
side of the thermometer. Note that the temperature
scale increases towards the bottom.
The current temperature can be found on either scale
although the maximum, or right scale, is easiest to read.
Resetting the Thermometer
Reset the thermometer after each set of readings by
pushing in the red bar in the middle. Hold the bar in
until the marker columns have come to rest on the mercury
columns.
Comments regarding the weather and haze conditions may
deal with present conditions, such as "extremely clean"
or "control burn in area." They may also describe more
broad conditions, such as "storm front passing through"
or "scattered rain showers all week." Describe any
weather or haze occurrence that you think may be of value
in interpreting data.
4.2 Transmitter Station - Routine Servicing
The following information describes Log Sheet entries and servicing
tasks required at the transmitter station.
DOCUMENTING
INITIAL
ALIGNMENT
To check the alignment, turn the flip mirror knob fully
clockwise against the stop to the "view" position.
Document the position of the receiver window with respect
to the circle on the data sheet with a "+." The receiver
would be at the intersection of the
n . n
r
Alignment Viewing Times
Do not make alignment checks or adjustments while the
transmitter is on. If the flip mirror knob is moved from
the "run" position to the "view" position while the
transmitter is on, the extinction reading for that hour
will not be valid. If a reading has been affected by an
alignment check, note this on the Log Sheet comment section,
Bad Viewing Conditions
If an initial alignment check is Impossible due to haze,
turbulence, or lighting conditions, return the flip
mirror to the "run" positionDo not attempt to align.
Record pertinent comments regarding alignment problems
to the right of the circle on the Log Sheet.
20
-------
CORRECTING
ALIGNMENT
ALIGNMENT
CORRECTED
WINDOWS CLEAN
UPON ARRIVAL
If the alignment has drifted so that the receiver is
not in the center of the reticule circle, adjust the alti-
azimuth base controls to center the receiver. Make sure
the flip mirror knob is fully against the stop while
aligning. Do this only after the initial alignment has
been documented.
Alignment Reticule
The figure below depicts the reticule as viewed through
The transmitter eyepiece:
2.3* Telescope Field of View
1* Beam of Transmitted Light
.17° Portion of Beam Used for Routine Monitoring
The circle depicted on the Log Sheet represents the
small .17° inner reticule circle. It is this circle
which must remain aligned on the receiver telescope
for correct instrument operation.
Alignment Hints
One of your eyes will be dominant; if you are having
difficulty viewing the scene, try it with your other
eye. Some people find it easier to view the scene from
behind the telescope while others prefer to view from
the side. Schedule site visits for times of the day with
the best viewing conditions. All shelters are equipped
with signal mirrors and flashlights for occasions when
alignment checks are made with operators at both stations.
Finally, keep the eyepiece clean for better viewing.
This entry is included to verify whether the alignment was
corrected. If the alignment was not corrected, comments
describing conditions should be written next to the align-
ment circle.
Remove the window pane from its frame and visually inspect
the shelter window for water drop deposits, film, unusually
heavy dust, and insects or pests that may reduce the trans-
mission of light through the glass. Make comments when
applicable. It is important to inspect the portion of the
glass pane which is directly in front of the transmitter lens.
Cleaning Optical Surfaces
The objective in cleaning glass is to remove highly
abrasive dust particles and film without damaging the
surface. Always remove the large particles with canned
21
-------
WINDOW CLEANED
SOLAR PANELS
CLEANED
LAMP LED "ON"
air first and progress towards the removal of films. Use
a light touch, plenty of cleaning fluid, and frequent
changes of cleaning paper. Clean with a circular, rubbing
motion. Always use compressed air in an upright position.
If the can is tilted, the propel!ant may be expelled onto
the glass surface. The propel!ant is greasy and difficult
to remove.
Shelter windows should be cleaned during every servicing
visit. If for some reason, windows are not cleaned,
document conditions in the comments section.
Window Cleaning Instructions
1. Remove the window pane from the frame.
2. Use canned air to dislodge particles from both
sides of the glass.
3. Use the compressed air to clean the window slot in
the frame, particularly at the bottom.
4. Inspect the hood and frame for spider webs.
5. Use only Kimwipes and alcohol to clean both sides of
the glass. Use plenty of cleaning fluid, change
Kimwipes often, and use a light hand.
6. Use compressed air on both sides to remove any
cleaning paper lint.
7. Reinstall window pane.
Transmitter Optics Cleaning
Use the compressed air to remove dust from the body of
the transmitter. Carefully, keeping the air can in the
upright position, remove dust particles from the trans-
mitter objective (front) lens. Clean the eyepiece with
alcohol and Kimwipes, but use only canned air to clean
the objective lens.
Use glass cleaner and paper towels to clean dust and dirt
from the solar panels. In the winter, sweep accumulated
snow off the panels, but avoid scraping ice as damage to
the panels could occur.
If the lamp voltage LED is lit while the transmitter
light is on, the lamp needs replacing. This check is only
valid when the instrument is in its "auto on" mode; if the
instrument is turned on with the test switch, the LED will
always go on. Leave the checklist square blank if this
check was not completed. The lamp LED check should be
made at least once a month.
The status of the LED is difficult to determine while in
direct sunlight. Shade the LED with your hand before
checking.
22
-------
LAMP CHANGED
TIME RESET
Procedures for changing lamps are described in Section
5.2. If a lamp change is made, document it on the Log
Sheet. The lamp number is written on a sticker affixed
to the back of the lamp.
Procedures for checking and resetting the transmitter
internal auto-timer are described in Section 5.1. Document
the results of a timing check before resetting the time.
If the time is reset, document this on the Log Sheet.
Timing checks should be made monthly.
Transmitter Timing
The transmitter should turn on under automatic control at
the top of every hour and turn off at 16 minutes past the
hour. Refer to Section 5.1 for additional information.
LAMP NUMBER
IN USE
TIMING CHECKS
COMMENTS
SUPPLIES
NEEDED
Document the lamp number in use.
to document lamp changes.
Use the comments section
Document the results of timing checks here. Procedures for
checking the system timing are discussed in Section 5.1.
Space for comments is provided at the bottom of the Log
Sheet. This space should also be used to request
additional servicing supplies.
4.3 Receiver Station - Routine Servicing
The following information describes Log Sheet entries and servicing
tasks required at the receiver station.
READINGS BEFORE
ALIGNMENT
READINGS AFTER
ALIGNMENT
TIME CHECK
Record the reading shown on the receiver computer
display upon entering the shelter. Also record the
time and toggle state.
If you are still in the shelter when the receiver computer
updates to a new reading, record the new information.
Record the exact time the transmitter light turns on or
off and the receiver toggle light changes state in the
appropriate space. Procedures for making system timing
checks are given in Section 5.1.
and write the time in the blank space.
System Timing
Circle "on"
or "off"
The transmissometer system operates according to the
timed sequence described below. It is possible to
check the system timing of both the receiver and the
transmitter from the receiver station.
23
-------
HR;MI;SEC
Action
GAIN
CAL
DIST
Al
A2
INT
CYCLE
DOCUMENTING
INITIAL
ALIGNMENT
09:00:00 Transmitter turns on
09:03:00 Receiver begins 10-min. average reading
(cannot be observed)
09:13:20 Receiver finishes reading, toggle changes
09:16:00 Transmitter turns off
10:00:00 Transmitter turns on
Sequence repeats hourly
The system clocks will drift over time. For correct
operation, it is critical that the receiver take its
reading well-centered within the lamp-on interval.
Receiver Computer Sticker
Correct switch and dial settings are documented on a
sticker affixed to the front panel of the computer. An
example of the sticker is included in Section 8.0
(Figure 8-7).
Record the value on the gain pot next to the indicator
bar. The value is always set to a whole number, such as
250 or 319.
Record the CAL (calibration) number dialed in with
the thumb switches.
Record the OIST (distance) dialed in on the thumb-
wheel switches.
Record the Al switch setting by circling the position
indicated on the Log Sheet.
Record the A2 switch setting by circling the position
indicated on the Log Sheet.
Document the INT (integration) setting by circling the
position indicated on the Log Sheet.
Document the cycle setting by circling the position
indicated on the Log Sheet.
Switch Setting Precaution
Do not change the INT and CYCLE switch positions; if
the settings are changed, a time reset may be required.
To check the alignment, turn the flip mirror knob fully
clockwise against the stop to the "view" position.
Document the position of the transmitter with respect to
the circle on the data sheet with a "+." The light source
would be at the intersection of the "+."
24
-------
Alignment Viewing Times
CORRECTING
ALIGNMENT
ALIGNMENT
CORRECTED
WINDOWS CLEAN
UPON ARRIVAL
If the transmitter shelter is easily visible, do not
interrupt a reading to make an alignment check. When
viewing conditions are marginal, use the transmitter
light source as an aid in alignment. The receiver can
be placed in the "view mode" for a short time immediately
after the transmitter turns on, or following a toggle and
reading update, without affecting a measurement. Document
any interruption of a reading on the Log Sheet.
Bad Viewing Conditions
If an initial alignment check is impossible due to haze
turbulence, or lighting conditions, return the flip
mirror to the "run" positionDo not attempt to align.
Record pertinent comments regarding alignment problems
to the right of the circle on the Log Sheet.
If the alignment has drifted so that the transmitter is
not in the center of the reticule circle, adjust the alti-
azimuth base controls to center the transmitter. Make sure
the flip mirror knob is fully against the stop while
aligning. Do this only after the initial alignment has
been documented.
Alignment Reticule
The figure below depicts the reticule as viewed through
The receiver eyepiece:
1.3' Telescope Field of View
.07* Detector Field of View
L
The circle depicted on the Log Sheet represents the
small .07° inner reticule circle. It is this circle
which should remain aligned on the transmitter for
correct instrument operation.
This entry verifies whether the alignment was corrected.
If the alignment was not centered, document its location
using the circle on the data sheet.
Visually inspect the shelter window for water-drop deposits,
film, unusually heavy dust, and insects or pests that may
reduce the transmission of light through the glass. Make
comments when applicable. It is important to inspect the
glass directly in front of the receiver lens.
25
-------
WINDOW CLEANED
SOUR PANELS
CLEANED
0V LIGHT ON
Shelter windows should be cleaned during every site
visit. If, for some reason, windows are not cleaned,
document conditions in the comments section.
Window Cleaning Instructions
1. Remove the window pane from the frame.
2. Use canned air to dislodge particles from both
sides of the glass.
3. Use the compressed air to clean the window slot in
the frame, particularly at the bottom.
4. Inspect the hood and frame for spider webs.
5. Use only Kimwipes and alcohol to clean both sides of
the glass. Use plenty of cleaning fluid, change
Kimwipes often, and use a light hand.
6. Use compressed air on both sides to remove any
cleaning paper lint. Make sure the compressed air can
is always held in the upright position.
7. Re-install window pane.
Cleaning Optical Surfaces
The objective in cleaning glass is to remove the highly
abrasive dust particles and film without damaging the glass
surface. Always remove the large particles with canned
air first and progress towards the removal of films. Use a
light touch, plenty of cleaning fluid, and frequent changes
of cleaning paper. Clean with a circular, rubbing motion.
Always use compressed air in an upright position. If the
can is tilted, the propel1 ant may be expelled onto the glass
surface. The propel!ant is greasy and difficult to remove.
Receiver Optics Cleaning
Use the compressed air to remove dust from the body of the
receiver telescope. Carefully, keeping the air can in the
upright position, remove dust particles from the telescope
objective lens. Clean the eyepiece with alcohol and
Kimwipes. Use only canned air to clean the objective lens.
Use glass cleaner and paper towels to clean dust and dirt
from the solar panels. In the winter, sweep accumulated
snow off the panels, but avoid scraping ice as damage
to the panels could occur.
If the over-voltage light is on, reset the computer by
turning the "on/off" switch off for a few seconds, and then
back "on." The light should not come back on. Document
this action in the Log Sheet comment section. Refer to
Section 8.3 for a discussion of this indicator light.
26
-------
STRIP CHART
MARKED
The following Information must be recorded on the chart at
each site visit:
CHART PAPER
CHART PENS
COMPUTER RESET
TIME RESET
COMMENTS AND
SUPPLIES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Event markers or "ticks"
Date and time
Location
Operator name
Receiver computer display value
Other information, such as:
A. Pens zeroed
B. New pens/paper
C. Computer reset
D. Alignment off/corrected
E. System timing off/corrected
Documenting Start and End of Chart Paper
When installing new chart paper, record the location,
date and time started on the outside of the chart. The
same information should be written and the end of the roll
upon chart removal. The procedure for changing chart paper
is described in the manufacturer's Instruction Manual.
Check the amount of chart paper remaining. A red line
will appear on the right side of the chart paper when
there is less than two days remaining on the chart.
Make sure the pens are leaving a bold trace and track
freely across the chart. Pen replacement is described
in the manufacturer's Instruction Manual.
Document whether or not a computer reset was done
during this site visit.
Resetting the Computer
The computer is reset by turning the power switch "off"
for at least one second and returning it to the "on"
position (see Section 5.1). This does not require
resetting the time.
Document whether or not a time reset was done during
this site visit.
Space for additional comments is provided at the
bottom of the Log Sheet. This space should also be
used to request servicing supplies.
27
-------
5.0 INTERMITTENT SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
This section details procedures for providing special system
servicing or maintenance tasks. The frequency of these tasks is outlined
in Section 4.0, Figure 4-1. The following topics are discussed:
1. System Timing Checks and Resets
2. Transmitter Lamp Changes
3. Strip Chart Servicing
4. Solar Power System Checks
5. AC Line Power System Checks
6. DCP System Checks
5.1 Checking and Resetting System Timing
When resetting the timing at both stations, reset the transmitter
timing first.
TRANSMITTER
TIMING CHECK
RECEIVER TIMING
CHECK
TIMING SEQUENCE
1. Set your digital watch by calling the National
Bureau of Standards in Boulder, Colorado (303/499-7111).
2. The transmitter beam can be observed at the receiver
station with the un-aided eye or through the telescope.
At the transmitter, light can be seen at the back of the
instrument through the lamp housing. Do not look into the
transmitter.
3. Observe the time the transmitter light turns either
"on" or "off." Document this on the appropriate Log Sheet.
Observe the receiver computer toggle light and record
the time it changes state (i.e., on to off, or off to on).
The transmissometer system should follow the following
timing sequence:
HR;MI:SEC
02:00:00
02:03:00
02:13:20
02:16:00
03:00:00
Action
Transmitter lamp turns "on"
Receiver begins 10-min. average reading
Receiver finishes reading, updates
display and changes toggle state
Transmitter lamp turns "off"
Sequence repeats.
TIMING TOLERANCE IMPORTANT--When there is less than 45 seconds, or
more than 5 minutes, between the toggle update and the
lamp turnoff, the timing system needs resetting.
O
z
z
c
rr
2
£
2
r
nr
28
-------
TRANSMITTER TIME 1. Set your digital watch before going to the station.
RESET
2. Arrive at the transmitter station at least five
minutes before the hour.
3. Leave the on/off switch in the "on" position (up),
and the test switch in the "off" position (down). Test
switches are on units with serial number 004 or higher.
4. Remove the control box cover (4 screws).
5. Precisely at the top of the hour (any hour), push
the time reset button all the way down, hold for 1/2
second, and release (see Figure 5-1).
6. Upon release of the time reset switch, the transmitter
will turn "on."
7. Replace the control box cover.
8. Verify the transmitter turns "off" at 16 minutes
past the hour.
RECEIVER TIME
RESET
9. Document the time reset on the transmitter Log Sheet.
1. Set your digital watch before going to the station.
2. Arrive at the receiver station at least five minutes
before the hour.
3. At two minutes and 30 seconds after the hour, turn
the computer power switch "off," leave the switch in the
"off" position for at least one second, and turn back "on."
For switch locations, see Section 8.0 (Figure 8-2).
4. At precisely 3 minutes after the hour, hold the
time reset switch in the "up" position for 1/2 second.
Let it return to its down or "run" position.
5. Verify that the reading updates and the toggle
light changes state at approximately 13 minutes and 20
seconds after the hour.
6. Document the time reset on the receiver Log Sheet.
29
-------
Power Cable
Connection
On/Off Switch
Power Cable
ConnectionL
Control
Cable
Connector
Test-
Switch
On/Off Switch
AGC 5 AMP
Fuse
AA Alkaline
Batteries
Integration Cycle
Settings Settings
Figure 5-1.
Lamp Check LED' Time Reset Switch
Control Box - Serial Nos. 001-004
AGC 5 AMP
Fuse
AA Alkaline
Batteries
r-*. i^*. n
D=O BO
c
INTEG,
64-
32-
76-
2-
Integration
Settings
CYCLE
Time Reset Switch
4-
2-
1-
20M-
-Cycle
Settings
\
Lamp Check LED^ CoXer Plate
Control Box - Serial Nos. 005 and higher
Transmitter Control Box.
30
-------
5.2 Transmitter Lamp Changes
IMPORTANT: Lamps are removed by pulling them out; do not loosen the screws
on the lamp housing plate.
LAMP REMOVAL 1. Refer to Figures 5-2 and 5-3 for the location of the
PROCEDURE items described.
2. If the transmitter is in the "run" mode and a
reading is being taken, do not disrupt the reading--
wait until the transmitter has turned "off."
3. Do not attempt to change lamps if there is less
than 5 minutes before the start of the hour.
4. Before removing the replacement lamp from the lamp
case, write today's date in the space labeled "lamp on"
on the lamp sticker.
5. Take the new lamp out of the lamp case, handling it by
the holder only. Do not touch the glass with your fingers.
6. Clean the lamp with alcohol and Kimwipes and remove lint
from the lamp by blowing with canned air. Be sure to hold
the can in the "upright" position. Carefully set the lamp
aside in a safe place.
7. Turn the transmitter power "off" at the control box.
8. Remove three of the four screws that hold the lamp
chamber cover in place. Loosen the front right screw
slightlythis screw will hold the cover in place. The
cover can pivot on the screw, exposing the lamp chamber.
9. Remove the old lamp by pulling out on the lamp holder.
Some lamps may have to be removed with the aid of a
flat-blade screwdriver. Do not push on the lamp from
inside the lamp chamber.
10. Place the old lamp in the lamp case. Mark the
date the lamp was removed on the "date off" space on
the lamp sticker.
31
-------
Flip Mirror Knob
-Eyepiece
amp Housing Plate
Lamp Socket
(Shown with Lamp
Installed)
Control Cable
Connection
Note: Lamp is Removed by
pulling Straight out.
Do Not Loosen
Housing Plate
Chopper Blade
Optical Feed Back
Block
Optical Feedback
Re-Amp Circuitry
Lamp
Control Cable
Connector
Figure 5-2. Transmitter Lamp Chamber.
32
-------
Lamp Number Sticker
Date On/Off Sticker
Lamp Calibration Number Settings
1. Lamp # requires a cal # of
2. Lamp #
3. Lamp #
4. Lamp #
requires a cal # of
requires a cal # of
requires a cal # of
1. When replacing spent lamps, always use lamp of next highest number.
2. Change Cal Number when replacement lamp is put into use.
3. Document lamp changes on Lamp Stickers and Operator Log Sheets.
4. Store spent lamps in lamp case.
This sticker is located in the lamp case.
Figure 5-3. Lamp Use and Calibration Stickers.
33
-------
LAMP INSERTION
PROCEDURE
CALIBRATION
SETTING
POST
CALIBRATIONS
(used lamps)
SPARE LAMPS
1. Insert the cleaned and labeled replacement lamp
into the lamp socket.
2. Be very careful to align the lamp contact pins with
the holder sockets before pushing the lamp in.
3. Observe the contact sockets inside the lamp chamber
as you are inserting the lamp. If the contact pins were
not aligned correctly with the sockets, the sockets may be
pushed out while inserting the new lamp. If the socket is
pushed into the lamp chamber, remove the lamp, push the
socket back in and try again.
IMPORTANT- -the lamp will not turn on unless proper contact
is made.
6. Push the lamp fully into the socket.
7. Replace the lamp chamber cover.
8. Turn the power switch to the
"on"
(up) position.
9. If your transmitter control box is equipped with a
test switch, move the switch to the "test" (up) position.
Verify that the new lamp works and return the test switch
to the "off" (down) position.
10. If your transmitter control box does not have a test
switch, verify that the lamp comes
"on" under auto-control
11. Document the lamp change on the operator Log Sheet.
Each lamp outputs a slightly different amount of light,
requiring a new calibration setting on the receiver
computer with each lamp replacement. Calibration numbers
associated with each lamp are documented on a sheet
(Figure 5-3) located in the lamp case. If a sheet is not
supplied, or is lost, the correct calibration number can
be obtained by calling ARS.
Lamps removed from service will be post-calibrated by ARS
technicians after yearly site visits. Care should be
taken in handling and transporting these lamps because
the filaments become very brittle and fragile with use.
One spare, calibrated lamp has been left at each site.
If a replacement lamp has been damaged, use the lamp
with the next higher number. Document this on the Log
Sheet under comments.
34
-------
5.3 Strip Chart Servicing
CHART PAPER Instructions for installation of chart paper can be
REPLACEMENT found in the manufacturer's Operators' Manual on pages
2-8 through 2-10. Advance the paper by hand for a few
sheets before loading the magazine to make sure the paper
is feeding correctly.
CHART MAGAZINE At each paper change, the chart paper roller should be
CLEANING cleaned with alcohol and Kimwipes. This will remove any
paper dust and chart pen ink that may have accumulated.
Use canned air, with can in upright position, to remove
paper dust from the drive gear assembly.
RECORDER Use canned air to remove dust from the control panel
CLEANING and the top of the recorder.
PEN REPLACEMENT Instructions for changing pens can be found on page 2-10
of the manufacturer's Operators' Manual.
5.4 Solar Power System Servicing
SOLAR PANELS 1. Clean solar panels with the supplied glass cleaner
AND WIRING and paper towels.
2. Inspect the glass for cracks and scratches.
3. Check mounting nuts and bolts for tightness.
4. Visually inspect wiring for signs of damage due to
rodents or chaffing.
5. If the panels are on a free-standing mount, check
that the alignment perpendicular to true south has not
been altered.
6. Document results of these checks on the operator
Log Sheets. Contact ARS if signs of damage are observed.
BATTERIES See Section 5-6.
5.5 AC Power System Servicing
SURGE PROTECTORS Visually check the status of the surge protector
indicator lights. For proper operation, the light should
be green. Refer to Section 8.10 for a description of the
surge protector. If the surge protector green indicator
light is not lit while the power is on, call ARS and a
replacement unit will be sent.
35
-------
BATTERY CHARGER
WIRING AND
CONNECTORS
BATTERIES
Periodically check the indicator dial on the face of the
battery charger. The charger at the receiver station
should always be very close to zero. The charger at the
transmitter station will rise to approximately 3 amps
while the light is "on" and will drop to zero as the
battery charges. Meter readings greater than this may
indicate a problem with the battery.
Periodically check wiring for damage and connectors
for tightness. Inspect battery connections for
corrosion and deposits.
See Section 5.6.
5.6 Storage Battery Servicing
BATTERY FLUID
LEVEL
BATTERY CONTACTS
CLEANING BATTERY
CONTACTS
Battery fluid level should be checked monthly. The
fluid level is visible through the plastic case of the
battery and should be between the two indicator marks
on the battery case. Batteries in the small version
transmitter shelters may be difficult to check. In
that case, a check of one battery would suffice.
If the battery fluid level is low, use only distilled
water to bring the level up. Low battery fluid levels
indicate a possible problem with the solar panel
regulators. ARS technicians should be informed of this
situation; more frequent inspections must be made.
Under normal operating conditions, battery fluid should
only need to be added during yearly ARS technician site
visits.
Visually inspect battery contacts for signs of excess
corrosion or deposits. Wire brushes have been supplied
to remove the deposits if needed. Under most conditions,
terminals will only need cleaning once a year by ARS
field technicians. If terminals need cleaning, follow
the directions listed below:
1. Notify ARS of the need to clean the terminals. Do
not attempt th'is if you are unsure.
2. Turn off power to the following instruments (do not
disrupt a transmissometer reading):
Receiver 1. Receiver computer
Station 2. Strip chart recorder
3. Unplug AC battery charger
36
-------
DEEP CYCLE
BATTERIES
BATTERY
REPLACEMENT
Transmitter 1. Transmitter
Station 2. Unplug AC battery charger
3. Make sure the wiring is labeled and is easily
identifiable as to positive (+) and negative (-) leads.
4. Draw a diagram depicting power lead attachments.
5. Remove and clean one contact surface at a time
starting with all negative leads (-).
CAUTION--sparks will occur if battery leads touch metal
objects or each other.
6. Clean contacts with the supplied wire brush.
7. Check the battery system wiring with your diagram
after you have finished and the wires are re-connected.
8. Turn all instrumentation back "on" and verify
correct operation of each component.
9. Document this servicing on the operator Log Sheets.
10. Call ARS and advise them that the servicing has
been completed.
Due to the heavy power consumption of the transmitter
while the light is "on" (2.7 amps), deep cycle batteries
are used at the transmitter station. With their increased
plate thickness, they are able to withstand the constant
"deep cycle" of heavy usage and charging. Automobile
batteries would not last long in this application.
Deep cycle batteries are also used at the receiver
station. Due to the constant load of the instruments,
an automobile battery would suffice for this application.
Deep cycle batteries are used throughout to keep the
batteries standard.
Batteries will be replaced every two years by ARS field
technicians. If an emergency replacement is needed, dry
batteries will be sent by freight. Battery acid will need
to be purchased and used on-site as acid cannot be mailed.
An alternate plan would be for ARS to send the necessary
funds for local purchase of replacement batteries.
37
-------
5.7 Data Collection Platform (DCP) Antenna Servicing
DCP SERVICING
ANTENNA
INSPECTION
CABLE AND
CONNECTOR
INSPECTION
On outward appearances alone, it is not possible to
tell if the DCP is working correctly. Therefore, aside
from physical inspection of the antenna, cable connectors,
and trickle charger, no servicing of the DCP is required.
The DCP antenna should be visually inspected periodically.
First, check that the mounting base is securely affixed to
the shelter. Secondly, the driver, reflector, and
directional elements should be securely attached and in
position. Lastly and most important, the antenna alignment
should be correct. See Section 8.7 for a description of
antenna components.
Inspect the antenna cable for rodent damage or chaffing.
The cable connector at the base of the antenna should be
checked for tightness periodically.
38
-------
6.0 TROUBLE-SHOOTING
Many times operators can diagnose and solve instrument problems in
the field, reducing costly site visits or loss of data. Two good practices
to follow in trouble-shooting are: 1) start with the simple checks and
progress towards the more complicated; and 2) break a system down into
individually testable sub-systems.
Many transmissometer system problems can be solved by checking items
in the following categories:
1. The "Obvious"
A. Power unplugged or not turned "on."
B. Flip mirror(s) not in correct "on" position.
C. Misalignment at one, or both, ends.
D. System timing out of synchronization.
E. Incorrect instrument settings used.
2. Power Supply
A. Battery voltage not high enough to run system.
B. Fuse Blown.
C. Incorrect polarity on power leads.
D. Power connectors not making good contact (pins).
3. Connectors
A. Connector not plugged in, or in wrong input position.
B. Connector not making good contact.
C. Connector pins or sockets damaged.
D. Damage to cable/connector, resulting in broken wire or short.
6.1 Before Calling for Assistance
Before reporting problems or requesting assistance in diagnosing an
instrument problem, please do the following:
r
1. Check problem areas listed in Section 6.0 (obvious sources,
power supply, connectors, etc.).
2. Follow procedures for trouble-shooting the component in question.
3. Have documentation of your tests available.
4. Have a field Operators' Manual available.
39
-------
Please call promptly with suspected or observed instrument problems. If
the person you need to speak with is not in, ask to be directed to another or
leave a message, including your name, location, and a brief description of
the problem(s) or need(s).
INOPERABLE
TRANSMITTER
6.2 Transmitter Trouble-Shooting
If the transmitter will not operate, check the following:
1. On/off switch in "on" position.
2. Power cable contacts at battery not loose, corroded,
or covered with excessive deposits.
3. Connectors firmly tightened at control box and
transmitter.
4. Battery voltage adequate (above 11 VDC).
5. Fuse inside control box intact.
CHOPPER ON/
NO LIGHT
TRANSMITTER NOT
"ON" FOR FULL
16 MINUTES
If the light chopper activates and stays "on," but the
lamp does not turn on, check the following:
1. Lamp filament broken. The lamp check LED will
light when the unit is "on" under auto-control.
2. Lamp pin/socket contact not made.
If the transmitter turns "on" at the correct time, but
does not stay "on" for the full 16 minutes, check the
battery voltage while the transmitter is "on." It
should remain above 10.5 volts.
6.3 Receiver Trouble-Shooting
POWERING UP
TOGGLE LIGHT
FLASHING
"on," the
When the receiver computer power is turned
computer will 'perform a series of internal checks
and then set the display to "001" (Serial #1-4) or "000"
(Serial #5 and up). The toggle, 0V, and OR lights should
be "off." If the display does not go to "000" or "001"
upon powering-up, this indicates a system or component
failure. Call ARS for further directions.
If during internal checks, the computer finds a problem
on the memory card, the toggle light will flash at
approximately one-second intervals upon powering up.
If this occurs, call ARS for further directions.
40
-------
OVER-VOLTAGE
LIGHT "ON"
TOGGLE DOES
NOT UPDATE
CHOPPER FAILURE
Refer to Section 8.3 for a description of the function
of the over-voltage light. To clear (turn-off) the
over-voltage light, the computer must be reset. Resets
are accomplished simply by turning the computer power
"off" for one second and turning the power back "on."
If the toggle light does not change state at the
correct time:
1. Check the system timingrefer to Section 5.1 to reset.
2. The computer may be locked up. When this happens, both
the toggle and the reading will stay the same until it is
reset. Reset by turning power "off" for 1 second.
3. The chopper may not be workingsee chopper failure
description.
4. The computer may be malfunctioningcall ARS for
further direction.
If the transmissometer is not taking readings when checks
on all components of the system show that it should be
capable of taking readings, check the following:
1. Remove the transmitter lamp chamber cover.
2. Verify that the light chopper blade (slotted disk)
is still mounted to the motor shaft.
3. If the chopper blade has detached, turn power to the
system "off." Remove the transmitter only and take it
back to the officetelephone ARS for further instructions.
Note: It is not possible to determine whether or not the
chopper blade is attached by observing the transmitter
through the telescope. Due to the speed at which the
chopper rotates, both conditions will look the same.
6.4 Strip Chart Trouble-Shooting
The following is a list of the most common strip chart operational
problems, resulting in lost data:
1. Zero/record button left in "zero" position.
2. Chart speed button left in "CM/Min" position.
3. Chart start/stop switch left in "stop" position.
4. Pen lifters left in "up" position.
5. Paper loaded incorrectly, resulting in jam.
41
-------
If problems with the strip chart occur, take a minute to verify that
the control switch or button settings match those listed on the strip chart
sticker.
FUSES:
AC OPERATION
FUSES:
DC OPERATION
If the strip chart does not function, the fuse may have
blown. If the unit operates from AC line power, proceed
with the following:
1. Check that the power indicator switch on the back
panel (Figure 8-4) is on the "AC line" position.
2. Check the surge protector for correct operating
status (see Section 8.10).
3. Check the fuse located in a black holder on the back
panel.
4. Check the circuit breaker if the fuse is intact.
5. If the fuse has blown, locate a replacement fuse.
Verify that the replacement fuse is the same as the blown
fuse by reading the specifications stamped on the end
of the fuse.
6. Before inserting the replacement fuse, turn recorder
power "off"--also turn off the chart drive. Disconnect
the Channel A and B "-" lines on the back panel (2 jacks).
7.
"on."
Insert the replacement fuse and turn the recorder
If the power on indicator does not light, turn
the unit off and recheck the fuse. If the fuse has
blown, call ARS.
8. If the power indicator light remains "on," connect
the signal input "-" lines one at a time while observing
the power indicator light.
9. If the fuse blows while connecting either input line,
disconnect the input "-" lines and turn the recorder power
switch "off."
10. If the problem cannot be corrected, call ARS for
further directions. If a replacement unit is sent, be
sure to read Section 7.7 on installing a new strip chart
recorder.
If the strip chart does not function, an internal fuse
may have blown. Fuses protecting recorders that operate
from DC power will "blow" if the power leads are connected
improperly (reverse polarity), if signal grounds are
attached incorrectly, or if recorder components have failed,
42
-------
The fuses are located inside the recorder. To check the
recorder operation:
1. Check that the power indicator switch on the back panel
(see Figure 8-4) is in the "12V" position.
2. Check the power leads on the terminal strip and the
battery for excessive corrosion or a bad connection.
3. Check the voltage reaching the recorder at the power
input banana jacks on the back panel. The voltage should
be above 10 VDC.
4. Before checking the fuse, turn the power switch
"off" and disconnect the Channel A and B "-" leads.
5. Take off the recorder cover by removing the six
Phillips head screws. Two screws are located on the
top of the cover, the other four are located on the
sides (two to a side near the bottom).
6. Carefully remove the cover by first sliding it
towards the back slightly before pulling up.
7. Inspect the two fuses located on a small circuit
board on the left side of the recorder.
8. Replace the bad fuse with the supplied replacement.
Verify that the replacement fuse is correct by comparing
specifications stamped on the fuse.
9. With the cover still off, turn the power switch
back "on" and observe the power indicator light. If
the fuse blows, turn the power switch "off," reinstall
the cover, leave the signal "-" leads disconnected, and
call ARS for further directions.
10. If the power indicator light remains "on," connect
the Channel A and B "-" lines one at a time while observing
the power indicator light and the fuses. If a fuse blows,
disconnect the signal "-" input lines, turn the power
switch "off," reinstall the cover, and call ARS for further
directions.
11. If the problem cannot be corrected, call ARS for
further directions. If a replacement is needed, be sure
to read Section 7.8 on installing a new strip chart recorder.
43
-------
6.5 DCP Trouble-Shooting
The operation of jthe DCP, as well as the monitoring of parameters
important to the correct operation of the DCP, 1s tracked daily at ARS.
Should a potential problem arise, a technician will call to have you check
the following:
1. Antenna alignment
2. Antenna elements
3. Cables
4. Connectors
Refer to Section 5.8 for descriptions of checks that can be made of
DCP components and Section 8.6 which describes DCP features (Figure 8-5).
If a data collection platform is transmitting at an errant frequency or time,
ARS technicians may ask that you disable the DCP. Refer to Section 7.2 for
instructions.
6.6 Solar Power System Trouble-Shooting
If a problem with the solar panel power system is suspected, first
check the servicing and maintenance items described in Sections 5.4 and 5.6,
then call ARS for directions before proceeding with further tests.
PANELS Solar panel systems are wired in parallel, so that an
individual, bad panel may not be easily identified aside
from physical damage; however, there is not much that can
go wrong with a solar panel. The most likely problem would
be with the regulators or with the storage batteries.
REGULATORS A bad regulator may inhibit panels from charging the
batteries. To check the voltage output of the panels,
proceed with the following:
1. Check the storage battery voltage when the panels have
been exposed to full sun for several hours. The batteries
should be "floating" at approximately 13 volts.
Note: Check the batteries at the transmitter station at 45
minutes past the hour after they have had a chance to
recharge from powering the lamp.
44
-------
2. If the batteries do not read approximately 13
volts, check the state of the charge of each battery
cell.with a hydrometer. If any cell 1s bad or If all
cells are low, call ARS for Instructions.
3. If the battery voltages are acceptable, turn off
all the Instruments, disconnect the solar panel "-" cable
from the regulator or battery and measure the output. The
panels should produce 18 to 22 volts under full sun.
4. Call ARS with the results of your tests,
6.7 AC Power System Trouble-Shooting
BLOWN BREAKERS- If a breaker has tripped, follow the procedure listed
RECEIVER below:
1. Unplug the surge protector. Do not plug the
battery charger back in.
2. Unplug the DCP trickle charger (3"x3"x4" metal box).
3. Reset the breaker. If the breaker trips, consult
an electrician.
4. If the breaker does not trip, try to isolate the
faulty component by the following tests:
A. Plug the DCP trickle charger in--note breaker
condition.
B. Plug the surge protector in after first discon-
necting the battery chargernote breaker condition.
C. Plug the battery charger in--note breaker condition,
If the breaker blows, disconnect the charger from
the battery and try again.
8. Phone ARS with the results of the test.
9. If either the DCP trickle charger or the battery
charger are malfunctioning, leave the units unplugged.
The system will operate for a few days on battery power
alone. ARS will send replacement components.
45
-------
7.0 REPLACING AND SHIPPING INSTRUMENTS
Follow the procedures described in this section for disabling,
shipping, and installing instruments. Damage to instruments can occur
not only during installation, but also while disconnecting. When removing
or replacing instruments, keep the following considerations in mind:
1. Always leave the on/off switch in the "off" position when
removing or installing instruments.
2. Avoid touching connector pins or circuit boards as static
electricity could damage sensitive components.
3. Double-check connectors, power polarity, and instrument settings
before applying power.
4. Follow procedures in the order they are given.
5. Call ARS technicians before proceeding if you have questions.
7.1 Removing the Transmissometer System
Take the appropriate shipping cases to the site with you when
removing the transmissometer system so that the instrument will be protected
during transit. See Section 7.10 for packing and shipping instructions.
TRANSMITTER 1. Take the gray, suitcase-style transmitter shipping
REMOVAL case with you to the site.
2. Turn the control box power switch "off."
3. Disconnect the power cable from the control box only.
Coil the cable and set next to the battery or, if fixed,
leave in position.
4. Disconnect the control cable from both the control
box and the transmitter. Coil and band the cable and
place in the shipping case.
5. Place the control box in the shipping case after
first enclosing in a plastic bag.
6. Remove the lamp from the transmitter. Label the
lamp sticker with the "off date" and store the lamp in
the lamp case.
46
-------
TRANSMITTER
REMOVAL-Cont.
RECEIVER
REMOVAL
7. Cover the telescope and lamp chamber ends of the
transmitter with plastic bags. Secure the bags in
place with rubber bands. Place the transmitter in the
shipping case.
8. Document removal of the instrument on the operator
Log Sheet.
1. Have both wooden shipping cases and the gray,
suitcase-style case on-site as you prepare to remove
the receiver.
2. Turn "off" power to the receiver computer.
3. Disconnect the receiver power, output, and photometer
head cables from the computer and place them aside. Coil
and band the photometer head cable.
4. Place the receiver computer in its shipping case.
5. Remove the detector head from the telescope with an
Allen wrench which has been included in the tool kit.
Wrap the detector head in a plastic bag and place it in
the gray, suitcase-style shipping case.
6. Cover both ends of the telescope with plastic bags
and place in the shipping case.
7. Document removal of the instrument on the operator
Log Sheet.
7.2 Removing the DCP
Refer to Figure 8-5 for the location of the switches and connectors
discussed. Figure 7.1 depicts the switches in detail.
DCP REMOVAL
IMPORTANT--Before disconnecting the DCP antenna cable,
some internal switch settings must be changed to inhibit
transmissions. Failure to do so may result in damage to
the DCP.
1. Open the hinged door of the DCP. Locate the six, square
red dial switches located on the circuit board on the
inside of the door.
2. Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, reset the
switches under "CHAN 1" to 9, 0, 0. The switch
immediately below the "100" on the circuit board should
be set to 9.
47
-------
DIAL SWITCH DIAGRAM
CHI Setting of
900 Inhibits
Transmission
CH2 Not Used;
Leave on 000
Figure 7-1. OCP Transmission Channel Switches.
48
-------
DCP REMOVAL 3. Close the OCR door and tighten the clasps.
Cont.
4. Before disconnecting the connectors on the side of
the DCP, note their locations and mark, if necessary.
Draw a wiring diagram if you think it will be helpful.
5. Disconnect all cables from the DCP input panel and
remove the DCP. Pack the unit for shipping in the
supplied box.
6. Document the removal of the DCP on the operator Log
Sheet.
7.3 Removing the Strip Chart Recorder
The strip chart recorder should be removed carefully, as both signal
wires from the receiver computer and power from the battery (DC operation)
are "live." Follow the procedures given below:
STRIP CHART 1. Turn off the receiver computer power.
RECORDER REMOVAL
2. Turn off the strip chart recorder power and unplug at
the surge protector if the unit is AC powered.
3. Disconnect the "+" lead of the power supply and
completely cover the metal portion of the banana jack
with electrical tape.
IMPORTANT--do not let this connector touch metal as a
large, potentially damaging spark will occur.
4. Remove the "-" lead of the power supply and tape
the end.
5. Remove the "+" leads of CHA and CHB inputs and tape
each one as it is taken off.
6. Remove the "-" leads of CHA and CHB inputs and tape
each one as it is taken off.
7. Place pen lifters for both channels in the "up"
position.
8. Remove and discard the chart recorder pens.
9. Remove any chart paper containing data after
documenting removal date, time, and comments. Mail
the used portion of the strip chart to ARS.
49
-------
STRIP CHART 10. Enclose the recorder in a plastic bag before placing
RECORDER REMOVAL it in the shipping case. Also coil the AC line-powered
Cont. cord (if supplied) and place it in the shipping box.
11. Record the following information regarding chart
removal and place inside the shipping box.
1. Location name
2. Date/Time
3. Operator name
4. Brief description of chart recorder problems,
if known.
12. Document removal of the strip chart on the
Operator Log Sheet.
7.4 Removing Air Temperature/Relative Humidity Sensors
1. Disconnect the air temperature/relative humidity cable at the sensor.
2. Tape the end of the cable connector with electrician's tape.
Allow the connector to hang down to avoid moisture entering the
connector.
3. Loosen the two clamps that hold the sensor in place and slide the
sensor out.
4. Pack the sensor in a cardboard box for shipping. No shipping
case has been supplied for this.
5. Document the removal of this sensor on the Operator Log Sheet.
7.5 Transmitter Installation
Transmissometers sent from ARS or Optec, Inc. will have receiver and
transmitter timers pre-set; however, to verify system timing is correct,
follow the procedure described in Section 5.1.
1. Inspect shipping case(s) for signs of damage upon receiving the
instrumentation. Remove the transmitter from the shipping
case and remove the plastic bags from the instrument.
2. Mount the transmitter on the alti-azimuth base and tighten the
lock-bolt. IMPORTANT--do not re-focus the transmitter.
3. Install the lamp with the lowest number after first cleaning and
labeling.
50
-------
4. Dust the objective lens with canned air. Be careful to hold the
can in the "upright" position.
5. Install the control box. Make sure the on/off and test switches
are in the "off" (down) position.
6. Connect the control cable to the instrument and the control box
making sure to seat the connectors properly. A small "detent" can
be felt when the connectors are fully seated.
7. Connect the control box power cable. Check that the power cable
is securely connected to the battery.
8. Turn "on" the control box on/off switch. If the time is between
the top of the hour and 16 minutes past, the transmitter will turn
"on" automatically. If the unit is operating, wait until 16 minutes
past the hour to verify the lamp turns "off" at this time.
9. If the time is not right for the transmitter to turn "on" under
auto-control, use the test switch (if equipped) to verify lamp
operation.
10. Verify that the system timer is set correctly. If the timer is not
set correctly, refer to Section 5.1 for instructions on how to reset
the timer.
11. Upon successful installation of the transmitter, complete the
tasks listed on the Transmitter Station Log Sheet. Document the
installation of the system and the lamp number placed into service.
7.6 Receiver Installation
1. Remove the receiver telescope from the wooden shipping case.
Remove the plastic bags from the instrument.
2. Mount the telescope on the alti-azimuth base and tighten the
lock-bolt.
3. Dust off the objective lens with canned air. Be sure to keep
the can in the "upright" position.
4. Mount the detector to the telescope by tightening the two
retaining Allen screws after fully seating the assembly. The
sides of the eyepiece/detector assembly should be perpendicular
to the ground.
5. Remove the receiver computer from the wooden shipping case and
place it in its correct position. Make sure the power switch is in
the "off" (down) position. Remove the four screws and take off the
top cover of the receiver computer.
51
-------
6. Touch the receiver computer case and any large, metal object
(such as the unpainted portion of post) to rid yourself of static
electricity.
7. Carefully, push down on the computer cards to make sure they
are fully seated.
8. Push down on the ribbon connector and the small two-conductor
connector located on the top cards.
9. Replace the computer cover and tighten the four screws. Connect
the output cable from the terminal strip board, and power cable
from the battery to the back panel of the receiver computer.
9. Plug the cable from the detector into the photometer input on
the back panel of the receiver computer.
10. Turn the computer "on"--the display should go to "000" or "001"
and the toggle, OR, and 0V lights should be "off." If this is
not the case, re-check board and connector seating.
11. Align the telescope, leave the flip mirror in the "on" position,
and await a reading and toggle update at 13 minutes past the hour.
12. Upon successful installation of the system, complete the tasks
listed on the Receiver Station ..og Sheet. Document the instal-
lation of the system on the Log Sheet.
13. Store the shipping cases in the receiver station.
14. Call ARS and notify field technicians after the transmissometer
has been installed.
7.7 DCP Installation
Any replacement data collection platform (DCP) sent from ARS will
be pre-programmed and in its "run" mode. It will start collecting data
as soon as the sensor input cables are attached. Data will be transmitted
after the antenna cable is attached and internal channel selection switches
are set to the proper position. Follow the steps listed below to install
the DCP. Refer to Figure 7.1 for the location of described parts.
1. Notify ARS technicians before going into the field to install
the DCP. The channel must be "activated" with the satellite
service center prior to transmitting.
52
-------
2. Locate the new DCP in the correct position within the shelter.
3. Connect the .trickle charger or solar panel power cable to the
correct position on the DCP panel. If a solar panel is used, it
should be connected directly to the connector labeled either "15
to 30 volt input" or "solar panel/batt charger." If AC power is
used, the trickle charger should also be plugged into the same
connector.
4. Connect the antenna to the gold coaxial connector located on the
upper right of the input panel.
5. Connect the sensor input cable from the terminal strip board to
the connector labeled either "transmissometer" or "tele #1."
6. Connect the air temperature/relative humidity sensor cable to the
position labeled "air temp/rel humidity."
7. Open the DCP door after loosening the clamps with a large, flat-
blade screwdriver
8. Change the setting of transmission Channel 1 from (3 switches)
900 to the channel noted on the DCP sticker (see Figure 8-7).
Channels used will be 009 for Eastern sites, and either 014 or
038 for Western sites.
9. Close the DCP door and re-tighten clasps.
10. Check the antenna alignment, elements, and cable, as described
in Section 8.7.
11. Store the DCP shipping box, unless it is needed to return a
malfunctioning DCP.
12. Document the DCP installation on the receiver station Operator
Log Sheet.
13. Notify ARS technicians when the installation is complete.
7.8 Strip Chart Recorder Installation
Care must be taken when connecting DC power to the strip chart because
the +12VDC wire comes directly from the battery. To avoid damage to the
recorder or the receiver computer, follow the procedures listed below:
IMPORTANT--do not allow the "+" lead of the DC power cord to touch
metal or the "-" lead as a potentially-damaging spark will occur.
1. Place the strip chart in its normal position within the shelter.
53
-------
2. Make sure the strip chart settings match those listed on the
strip chart sticker. See Section 8.5 for a description of
the controls.
3. Set the power source switch, located on the back panel, to the
correct position:
"AC line" - if AC line power is used
"12V" - if battery power is used
4. Leave the strip chart power switch in the "off" position.
5. Turn the receiver computer power "off."
6. Connect the green (-) and yellow (+) labeled sensor input banana
jacks to the back of the strip chart recorder. The (-) leads
attach to the black connectors, and the (+) leads attach to the
red connectors under the appropriate channels.
7. If battery power is used, connect the red "+" lead of the power
supply to "Ext Battery +" before connecting the black "-" lead.
8. If AC line power is used, plug the power cord into the chart
recorder and then into the surge protector.
9. Before turning on the power, double-check the wiring.
10. Turn the power "on"--the power on indicator should light. If
it does not, check the settings and wiring.
11. Service the strip chart as described in Section 5.3.
12. Document the installation of the strip chart on the Receiver
Station Log Sheet.
13. Call ARS to advise technicians of the installation.
7.9 Air Temperature/Relative Humidity Sensor Installation
1. Slip the sensor into the mounting clamps. Oo not tighten yet.
2. Attach the sensor input cable after inspecting for dust and
debris within the connector. Use canned air to clean the
connector if needed. Wipe a rag around the thread inside the
connector if excess dust has collected there.
3. Tighten the sensor mounting clamps.
4. Document the installation of the sensor on the Receiver Station
Operating Log Sheet.
5. Call ARS to advise technicians of the installation.
54
-------
7.10 Packing and Shipping
SHIPPING CASES
SHIPPING COSTS
INSURANCE
SHIPPING
MISCELLANEOUS
Shipping cases have been provided for the transmissometer
computer, telescope, and transmitter. The original
manufacturer's box for the strip chart recorder has also
been left on-site. Some sites have DCP shipping boxes;
these can be sent from ARS if needed. Shipping containers
for other equipment or instruments must be found locally.
Shipping costs should be charged to the air quality
project's account. Other arrangements can be made if:
1. UPS shipment is required and cannot be charged to
the air quality account, or
2. There are problems meeting insurance requirements
(government use of U.S. mail), or
3. An air quality account does not exist.
Call ARS to discuss alternate plans for covering
shipping costs.
Items shipped to ARS should be insured for the
following amounts:
1. Receiver computer
2. Receiver telescope
3. Transmitter
4. Data collection platform
5. Air temp/rel humidity sensor
6. OCP antenna
6,000
4,000
6,000
6,000
1,000
300
Most other items do not need to be insured. If you
have questions regarding insurance, call ARS technicians.
Use packing tape in addition to a nut and bolt to seal the
shipping cases. When shipping items in a cardboard box, use
nylon filament packing tape to help strengthen the box.
If government mailing franks are used, write your location
above the "return address." If the shipped items are not
expected at ARS, or if an explanation on the return of the
items would be valuable, enclose it in an envelope within
the shipping case or box.
55
-------
SHIPPING Mail all items, including correspondence and instruments,
ADDRESS to:
Air Resource Specialists, Inc.
1901 Sharp Point Drive, Suite E
Fort Collins, Colorado 80525
(303) 484-7941
Notify ARS when and with which shipper monitoring components
were sent so that an expected date of delivery is known.
56
-------
8.0 MONITORING SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
This section presents transmissometer system component diagrams and
detailed descriptions of system components, including:
- Transmissometer transmitter
- Transmissometer receiver
- Terminal strip connector board
- Strip chart recorder
- Data collection platform
- Air temperature/relative humidity sensor
- Solar power system
- AC line power system
- Support equipment
8.1 Monitoring System Diagrams
Diagrams of the transmissometer system monitoring components
presented in this section support the discussions and operating
procedures presented throughout this manual. The following diagrams
are presented:
Figure Number
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
Title
Transmitter Component Diagram
Receiver Component Diagram
Terminal Strip Wiring Diagram
Strip Chart Component Diagram
DCP Logger Component Diagram
DCP Antenna Component Diagram
DCP, Receiver, and Strip Chart Stickers
O CO
m -<
CO CO
O H
2 2
13 S
H _
3
C/5
2
C
57
-------
Lamp Housing
Access'
Eyepiece
Telescope Tube
Lens Position Screw
(Preset - do not
adjust or loosen)
Objective Lens
Flip
Control Cable
La'mp Housing
Mirror Knob
Eyepiece
Flip Mirror Knob
Lamp Housing Plate
Lamp Socket
(Shown with Lamp
Installed)
Control Cable
Connection
Note: Lamp is Removed by
pulling Straight out.
Do Not Loosen
Housing Plate
Control Box Access
Control Cable
Connectioi
Power Connectio
Test Switc
(SN 5 and above)
On/Off S
p Status LEO
Figure 8-1. Transmitter Component Diagram.
58
-------
Objective Lens
Thumbscrew
Objective Lens
Telescope Tube
Photometer Cable
Eyepiece
Photometer Head
Flip Mirror Knob
"Objective Lens
Assembly
Mounting Plate
Gain Pot-
Toggle Light.
Over Range (OR>
Indicator
Display Path Dial Cal Dial
Photometer Output
and Power Cable
Connections on Rear
Panel/'
A2
INTEa(MIN)
10 X>
CYCLE |
'H »M /
: /
On/Off Switch
Switch
Figure 8-2. Receiver Component Diagram.
59
-------
Black
Zompul
Output
Connecto
(Bw) Yellow
1
(
«
<
1
c
u
ter\ /
Jt V
:\oy
dix G
ormation.
:\~~
D \
(CR/SD) White
(Toggle) Orange
(Ben Grd.) Green
(Toggle Grd.) Black
(CR/SD Grd.) Brown
(RF Shield) Bare
/~^\ r*\.
r\f\
\J ^
Df%
Or*\
w v-r
00
00
on.
00
00
00
Yellow
White
Orange
Green
(Bw)
(CR/SD)
(Toggle)
(Bm Grd.)
Black (CR/SD Grd.)
Brown (Toggle Grd.)
Bare
(RF Shield)
Strip Chart
Power
Black (-)
Red( + )
OOOOOOOOOO66
s ooooooooooop
3- Black (-) 12VDC
5 Red( + )12VDC
j . .
3
5
^ To Battery
L.
,
e
v
-= Red
3 Blue
£ Purple
Z Gray
/
~* /
C
c
L
C
B^
/f
&
I|( + ) 12VD^ Red
Black
IJ(-) 12VD
Green
J^wil D
.Grpen
I|CH.A.
Yellow
^ \ S QCH.B +
ctorA
r
Yellow
~"lCH.A+
Fy Black
"~^ Brown
N Green
_J
~~> Blue
J
~\ White
^
j* '
~
White
Blue
Green
Brown
Figure 8-3. Terminal Strip Wiring Diagram.
60
-------
Chart Paper-
Magazine
Pen Lifters
Event Markers
i i i i i i
© CD
CD
m
v oy
m
A
Chart Speed Selector /
Chart Start/Stop
Power On/Off
Range Switches
:Zero Control
Zero/Record Button
CH
CH.B Input
Cal/Rec Switch
CH A
CH.A Input
Fuse \
O
o
Power Save Switch
-Power Source
Selector
AC Power Plug External Battery
Connections
Figure 8-4. Strip Chart Component Diagram.
51
-------
Support Card
Microprocessor Card
DCP Input Panel
Antenna Connector
Transmissometer
Input
Solar Panel or
Trickle Charge
Do Not Use
AT/RH Connector
Programmer Set I/O
IMPORTANT: Some DCP Panels
May Differ from the one shown.
DCP Component Diagram
GOES Transmitter
5404004 .7 MHz Synthesizer
Secondary Channel Switches
Primary Channel Switches
DIAL SWITCH DIAGRAM
CHANNEL ONE
CHANNEL TWO
Fuses
Battery (12 VDC)
Dessicant Indicator
Door Lamps
Side view DCP Input panel
IMPORTANT--DCP panels may differ from the above unit.
Figure 8-5. DCP Logger Component Diagram.
62
-------
Directional Elements
Driver Elements
Retlector Elements
Base Plate
(Version A)
Coaxial Cable Connector
Drain Hole
Base Plate
(Version 8)
Figure 8-6. DCP Antenna Component Diagram.
53
-------
Strip Chart Settings
1. Chart speed -
.2. CHA range -
3. CHB range -
CM/HR
4. Both zero buttons - record position.
5. CHB zero knob pulled out (x5 position).
6. CHA zero on chart paper at 0.0.
7. CHB zero on chart paper at 8.8.
8. Both pens in down position.
9. Chart and power switches "On".
Strip Chart Documentation
1. "Hack" marks on chart paper (orange
buttons).
2. Location, date and local time.
3. Operator name.
4. Receiver panel reading.
5. Receiver alignment comments.
6. Stirp chart servicing comments.
7. Any additional monitoring comments.
6/88
DCP Operating Parameters
Serial #-.
ID:
Chan nel:
Transmit Times:
Antenna Azimuth (°T):
Antenna Inclination:
Comments: __-______
This sticker should be
affixed to the top right
corner of the strip chart
recorder.
This sticker should be
affixed to the top left
surface of the strip chart
recorder.
This sticker should be
affixed to the top left
corner of the DCP door.
Panel Setting
At: C B VR
A2: SO CR
Integ. Time: 1 10 30 60
Cycle Time: C 20M 1H 2H 4H
Path: (km) Gain: _
Calib: .
This sticker should be
affixed to the receiver
computer front panel.
Figure 8-7. DCP, Receiver, and Strip Chart Stickers.
64
-------
8.2 Transmitter Component Descriptions
Refer to Figure 8-1 for the location of the following components:
8.2.1 Transmitter Telescope
FLIP MIRROR
KNOB
EYEPIECE
LENS POSITION
LOCKING SCREW
TELESCOPE TUBE
LAMP CHAMBER
LAMP SOCKET
"view"
The flip mirror knob changes the position of an internal
mirror. When the knob is in its fully-clockwise or "vie
position, the image is directed to the eyepiece. When
the knob is in its fully counter-clockwise or "run"
position, the image is directed to the photodetector for
measurement.
The eyepiece is used to check and re-position transmitter
alignment. An image of the scene with the view transposed
left to right will be visible when the flip mirror knob
is rotated fully clockwise. The reticule markings are
super-imposed over the scene as an aid to alignment. The
transmitter must be aligned so that the receiver is
always within the center circle.
IMPORTANT--no readings are taken with the flip mirror
in the "view" position.
The lens adjustment screw holds the objective lens in
position.
IMPORTANT--do not attempt to focus the transmitter.
Re-positioning the objective lens will change the
transmitter light output, requiring a re-calibration.
The telescope tube holds the objective lens at a constant
distance (focus) from the lamp filament. The objective
lens is used both to focus the image for alignment and to
concentrate the outgoing light beam. The tube should
always be mounted securely to the flip mirror assembly
with the two Allen screws machined into the flip mirror
block.
The lamp chamber contains the lamp, chopper system, and
the optical feedback block. To avoid the possibility
of contaminating the optical surfaces with dust, the
chamber should only be opened if servicing is required.
The type of optical system used in the transmitter to
concentrate the light beam requires accurate
positioning of the lamp filament. The machined lamp
socket assures that each lamp is mounted in the same
position.
65
-------
LAMP SOCKET
PLATE
The lamp housing plate accurately positions the lamp
socket which, in turn, accurately positions the lamp and
its filament.
IMPORTANT--the plate should never be loosened; movement
of the lamp housing plate will require factory servicing of
the instrument. Access to the lamp chamber is from the top.
8.2.2 Transmitter Control Box
ON/OFF SWITCH
TEST SWITCH
LAMP STATUS LED
HAND-HELD RADIO
PRECAUTION
This switch controls power to the control box (on - up).
The transmitter time-keeping circuitry runs from an internal
battery and is not affected by the position of this switch.
If power is applied to the transmitter when the auto timer
circuit is in the "operate" mode, the lamp and chopper will
come "on." If the auto timer is in the "wait" mode, the
light will not come "on."
The test switch, present on units with serial numbers
greater than four, is used to manually turn the
transmitter "on" without affecting the internal time-
keeping circuitry. The lamp status LED will light when
the test switch is in the "up" or "test" position.
Keep in mind the transmitter will not turn "off" when
the test switch is moved to the "off" position (if the
internal auto-timer is in the "operate" mode).
The lamp status light indicates whether or not the lamp
has aged or been damaged to the point where the optical
feedback controller cannot keep the light output constant.
The LED must be observed while the transmitter is "on"
under automatic control. If the LED is "on," the lamp
needs to be replaced. Remember, the LED will always light
when the test switch is used.
The transmitter circuitry, especially the internal auto-
timer, can be adversely affected by strong radio signals.
Do not transmit on a hand-held radio within 10 feet of the
transmitter. Avoid aiming the antenna at, or over, the
circuitry. Strong radio signals may reset the internal
auto-timer, resulting in incorrect system timing.
8.2.3 Transmitter Cables and Connections
POWER CABLE
CONNECTION
A two-conductor power cable from a power supply or
battery connects to this input plug. Pin 2 of the plug
is for +12VDC, Pin 3 is for power return (-). Reversing
polarity or connecting a supply greater than 17VDC will
cause the fuse inside the controller box to blow.
66
-------
CONTROL CABLE
CONNECTION
The cable that carries power and signals from the control
box to the transmitter connects to these input plugs. Both
ends of the cable are identical and are interchangeable.
A small indentation can be felt when tightening this type
of connector, indicating the fully-secured position.
8.3 Receiver Component Descriptions
Refer to Figure 8-2 for the location of the following components:
8.3.1 Receiver Computer
ON/OFF SWITCH
TIME RESET
DISPLAY
The On/Off switch serves two purposes: it controls
power to the computer, and acts as a computer reset.
Upon powering up, the LCD display should, after a short
period, display 000 or 001. If the computer should lock
up, the on/off switch can be used to reset the system.
Resetting is accomplished by holding the switch in the
"off" position for at least one second before turning
"on." Like the transmitter, the receiver's auto-timer
circuitry is powered by internal batteries and is not
affected by the on/off switch.
The time reset switch, when activated, resets the internal
timer and defines the start times for the integration and
cycle intervals. If settings on either the INTEG or CYCLE
switches are changed, the internal timer must be reset.
The timer reset switch has no effect when the computer
is set to the "continuous" mode (INTEG - 1, CYCLE = C).
The small LCD display, on the receiver computer front
panel, displays readings as selected by switch Al. The
range of the display for the various readings is:
C Raw Instrument Readings. The range is from 000,
indicating no light is visible to 999 counts. Raw
readings should always be less than the calibration
number. The higher the raw reading, the cleaner the
air.
B Extinction Values (in km"*). The range is from .000
(000 displayed), indicating impossibly clean air to an
extinction of .999 (999 displayed), which corresponds
to a visual range of 3.92 km. For visual ranges less
than 3.92 km, .999 will continue to be displayed.
Extinction values should not go below 0.007, which is
the calculated theoretical minimum of .009 minus
instrument and rounding error of .002. The lower the
extinction value, the cleaner the air.
57
-------
Al SWITCH
A2 SWITCH
INTEG (MIN)
CYCLE
GAIN POT
VR Visual Range (km). The range for this setting is
from 000 km, indicating no transmitter light was
visible, to 999 km--an impossibly high value.
The maximum possible visual range is 391 km. The
higher the visual range, the cleaner the air.
The Al switch selects the computer output to both the
front panel display and to analog line #1 used by the
data loggers.
C Raw instrument readings in counts
B Extinction values in units of /km"1
VR Visual range in units of km
The switch must remain on the setting shown on the
receiver settings sticker.
The A2 switch selects the computer output to analog
line #2 used by the data loggers.
SO Standard deviation of the raw instrument readings
CR Chart recorder output of raw readings
This switch must remain on the setting shown on the
receiver settings sticker.
The INTEG switch selects the integration or averaging
time period in minutes. The shortest possible time
interval for a reading is one minute. A ten-minute
averaged reading is, therefore, based upon 10 one-minute
readings. A change in switch position requires that a
time reset be made.
The CYCLE switch selects the time interval between the
start of each reading. A setting of C, for continuous,
indicates there is no time delay or interval between
readings. Other settings dictate time intervals of
between 20 minutes and 4 hours. For example, a cycle
time of 1 hour (1H) with an integration time of 10
minutes (10M), would provide a 10-minute average every
hour. For routine operation, this switch must remain
on the setting shown on the receiver computer settings
sticker. A change in switch position requires that a
time reset be made.
The gain pot determines the amount of amplification the
raw signal receives before being digitized by the analog
to digital (A/D) converter for use in the computer. The
gain should only be changed by trained service technicians.
68
-------
OVER-RANGE
INDICATOR
(OR)
OVER-VOLTAGE
(0V) INDICATOR
TOGGLE LIGHT
PATH DIAL
When the over-range light is "on," it indicates that the
value sent from the computer to the display is too great
for the display to handle. This may occur, for example,
when a storm obscures the transmitter light. The receiver
computer will then calculate an infinitely high extinction
and output a very high (over-range) value to the display.
This condition is indicated by the over-range (OR) light.
The display will show 1000, its maximum value. The OR
light will extinguish on its own after a within-range
reading has been taken.
The over-voltage light indicates that either the gain
boosted raw reading is too great to be accepted by the
analog to digital converter, or that the background
lighting is bright enough to saturate the detector. The
first condition is unlikely as the proper gain setting
is determined when calculating the calibration factor.
A saturated detector can occur if the sun rises or sets
near, or within, the field of view of the receiver
telescope. It can also occur if extremely bright clouds
or snow cover are within the field of view. Once the 0V
light goes "on," it will stay "on" as an indication to the
operator that an 0V condition has occurred. Resetting the
computer, by turning the power switch "off" for one second,
will clear the indicator light. If this action is taken,
it should be noted on the Receiver Station Log Sheet.
The toggle light indicates a reading update. At the end of
an integration period, the toggle light will change state
from "on," to "off" or vice-versa. The toggle status is
also output to the data loggers. The toggle light has three
important functions:
1. It indicates a computer lock-up or failure.
2. It can be used to differentiate a computer lock-up from
consecutive, identical readings.
3. It provides the only visual indicator to reliably check
the receiver auto-timer system.
The path dial is used to input the line-of-sight distance
between the transmitter and the receiver into the computer.
The distance is measured during installation with a laser
range finder and is expressed in kilometers. The path
distance dial should always be set to the distance marked
on the receiver computer settings sticker. An incorrect
distance setting will not affect the raw readings, but will
result in the calculation of erroneous extinction values.
59
-------
CAL
HAND-HELD RADIOS
PRECAUTION
A calibration number is calculated for each lamp. Since
all lamps are slightly different, a new calibration number
must be dialed in for each replacement lamp. The CAL number
represents the raw reading which would be obtained if the
atmosphere had a theoretical 100% transmission. The CAL
number should not be changed, unless directed by field
service technicians.
The receiver computer circuitry, especially the
internal auto timer, can be adversely affected by
strong radio signals. Do not transmit on a hand-held
radio within 10 feet of the computer. Avoid aiming the
antenna at, or over, the computer. Strong radio signals
may reset the timer circuit, resulting in an incorrect,
out-of-synch system timing.
8.3.2 Receiver Telescope
FLIP MIRROR
KNOB
EYEPIECE
OBJECTIVE LENS
THUMBSCREW
The flip mirror knob is used to change the position of
an internal mirror. When the knob is in the fully
"clockwise" or "view" position, the image is directed to
the eyepiece. When the knob is in the fully "counter-
clockwise" or "run" position, the image is directed towards
the photo-detector.
IMPORTANT--during alignment, the knob must be turned
fully "clockwise" against the stop to the "view" position.
If the knob is not positioned fully against the stop,
incorrect alignment could occur. Once alignment is
completed, the knob must be turned fully "counter-
clockwise" to the "run" position. No readings will be
taken if the flip mirror is left in the "view" position.
The eyepiece is used to check and re-position instrument
alignment. As with the transmitter, an image of the scene
with the view transposed left to right will be visible when
the flip mirror knob is rotated fully clockwise. Reticule
markings are super-imposed on the scene for use in alignment.
The transmitter light should be within the small inner
circle.
The objective lens thumbscrew holds the objective lens
assembly in place. The focus is set correctly during
installation. Sometimes image degradation due to turbulence
is mistaken as incorrecf focus. Do not adjust the focus.
70
-------
OBJECTIVE LENS
ASSEMBLY
OBJECTIVE LENS
TELESCOPE TUBE
PHOTOMETER HEAD
The objective lens assembly on instruments with serial
numbers 001-004 have aperture rings glued or taped in
place over the end to allow a known amount of light
collection by the telescope. These rings should always
be firmly fixed in place. Later units have aperture rings
built into the lens assembly.
The receiver telescope is equipped with an expensive
objective lens. The delicate, coated surface of this
lens can be easily damaged or marked by incorrect
cleaning. Field operators should avoid physically
touching the lens; periodic cleaning of the surface
with photo-quality canned air is sufficient under normal
circumstances.
The objective lens is held in place and the detector is
shielded from stray light by a thick-walled telescope
tube. A light-trapping baffle, mounted inside the
tube, further protects the detector from stray light.
The photometer head contains the photodiode detector,
detector signal pre-amplification circuitry, filter,
and the flip mirror. The photometer head must be
securely attached to the telescope with the two Allen
screws provided for this purpose.
8.4 Terminal Strip and Wiring Descriptions
A terminal strip is used as an interface between the transmissometer
and the data loggers. It provides an excellent place to trouble-shoot the
system. A wiring diagram of the terminal strip board is shown in Figure 8-3.
TERMINAL STRIPS
TRANSMISSOMETER
SIGNALS
DCP INPUT
SIGNALS
Two terminal strips are mounted on the board. The
vertical strip connects the transmissometer to the data
loggers. The horizontal strip is used to provide 12VDC
power to the strip chart (when needed) or to other
equipment.
Transmissometer signals exit the receiver computer at
the port marked "output" and enter the left side of the
vertically-mounted terminal strip. The signals are
differential--each signal has its own ground.
The signal cable to the DCP exits the right side of the
vertical terminal strip and enters the Handar 540A DCP
at the port marked either "TRANS INPUT," or "TELE #1."
71
-------
STRIP CHART
INPUT SIGNALS
CONNECTOR PIN-
OUTS
RECONNECTING
WIRES
The signal cable to the strip chart exits the right
side of the vertical terminal strip where it shares
terminal positions with the DCP wiring. The signals
enter the back of the strip chart with labeled banana
jacks. The 12VDC power supply to the strip chart shares
this cable and also enters the strip chart with labeled
banana jacks.
A description of the signal cabling and connectors can
be found in Appendix G.
Cables are fixed to the terminal strip board with strain
reliefs so it is unlikely that a signal wire will come
loose from the terminal strip. If a wire does detach,
strip the wire's jacket back 3/8 inch, double the wire
back on itself, insert into the screw hole, and tighten
to clamp down on the wire. Oo not overtighten as the
wire strands will break. Refer to the wiring diagram
to verify correct wire placement, and document this
repair on the Log Sheet.
8.5 Strip Chart Component Descriptions
Refer to Figure 8-4 for the location of the strip chart controls and
connections described below:
CHART PAPER
MAGAZINE
CHART PENS
PEN LIFTERS
The entire chart paper magazine removes for easy paper
installation, as described on pages 2-8 through 2-10 of
the manufacturer's instrument manual. Blank paper is
stored at the back of the magazine, while paper with
recorded data folds into a storage area at the front.
Chart recorder pens slip into holders, as described on
pages 2-10 of the manufacturer's manual. It is
important that the pens be pushed all the way into the
mounts. Note that the pen positions, as they mark on the
chart paper, are offset slightly. This is important to
keep in mind when looking at the strip chart data.
Pen lifters lift the pens off the chart paper to prohibit
recording or to make installation of new pens easier.
IMPORTANT--pen lifters should be in the fully
position for routine operation.
'down"
72
-------
EVENT MARKERS
RANGE SWITCHES
ZERO CONTROL
KNOB
ZERO RECORD
BUTTON
POWER ON/OFF
SWITCH
CHART START/STOP
SWITCH
CHART SPEED
SELECTOR
Event markers are momentary-on push buttons that, when
depressed, make a "tick" mark on the strip chart trace.
These tick marks are used to accurately record events
such as field operator servicing visits. Tick marks on
the trace should always have a time and date written
next to them. When making tick marks, depress the event
markers 4 or 5 times rapidly to make a good positive mark.
Range switches should be set to the values listed on the
strip chart settings sticker. For most locations, CHA
should be set to the 1-volt position and CH-B to the 50-
volt position. The 50-volt setting is a combination of the
10-volt push-button and the zero control knob pulled out to
the X5 position.
The zero control knob serves two functions: 1) it
positions the pens to the correct zero position on the
chart paper (The zero position can only be adjusted when
the zero/record button is in the zero position.), and 2)
it expands the range settings by a factor of five; for
example, a range switch setting of 10 becomes 50 volts
full scale when the zero control knob is pulled out.
The zero/record button adjusts the pens to their correct
zero position when used in conjunction with the zero control
knob.
IMPORTANT--the button must be in its record position
for routine operation.
The power on/off switch controls the supply of power to
the recorder regardless of the power supply used.
This switch stops movement of the chart paper. It does
not inhibit the pens from changing position as input
voltages change. With the slow chart speed used in the
transmissometer monitoring system, it is possible to
write strip chart documentation on the "moving" chart
paper. This switch should never need to be used.
IMPORTANT--no data will be recorded when the switch is in
the "stop" position.
The speed at which the chart paper passes the recording pens
is selected by these switches. The speed is determined by a
combination of the setting chosen from the upper six switches,
and the setting of the lower switch. These switches should
remain in the positions listed on the strip chart settings
sticker. For routine monitoring, the button marked "1"
should be depressed and the bottom button should be in the
"up" or "cm/hr" position.
73
-------
CH-A INPUT
CH-B INPUT
CAL/REC SWITCH
FUSE
EXTERNAL BATTERY
CONNECTOR
POWER SOURCE
SELECTOR
POWER SAVE
SWITCH
The analog voltage representing the transmissometer
extinction signal inputs the strip chart recorder at CH-A
on the back panel. The banana jacks on the strip chart
cable are labeled: the CH-A positive lead connects to the
plug marked "+," and the negative lead connects to "-."
The analog voltage, representing toggle state (on or off),
inputs the strip chart recorder at CH-B on the back panel.
The CAL/REC (calibrate/record) switch puts the recorder in
either the "test" or "operate" mode. If the switch is
placed in the "CAL" position, an internally-generated 50-
mi Hi volt voltage is sent to the channel. This known
reference voltage is used to check or verify correct
recorder operation. For routine monitoring, the switch
should remain in the "record" position.
IMPORTANT--no data is recorded when the switch is in the
"CAL" position.
The fuse contained within the fuse holder is used only
when the recorder is operated from AC power. Spare fuses
are supplied with the servicing equipment.
If DC battery power is used to operate the strip chart
recorder, the power jacks connect at the position labeled
"EXT battery" on the back panel. Care must be taken to
observe correct polarity.
The power source switch selector position must match the
type of power supplied. When battery power is used, the
switch must be set to 12V, not 24V. When the AC power is
used, the switch must be set to "AC line."
The power save switch reduces power consumption when only
one channel of data (CHA) is to be collected. If the pen
on Channel B fails to respond.to signals or changes in
control switch settings, check the position of the switch.
This switch must remain in the "off" position.
8.6. DCP Component Descriptions
Refer to Figure 8-5 for the location of the components listed below:
ON/OFF SWITCH
The main system on/off power switch is located next to
the fuse holder near the hinge. Do not turn this switch
"off" unless directed by ARS.
IMPORTANT--if power is turned "off," the internal program
will be destroyed and the unit will require re-programming.
74
-------
FUSES
BATTERY
DESICCANT
INDICATOR
BOX CLOSURES
SUPPORT CARD
CPU CARD
MET CARD
Three fuses mounted in holders next to the on/off switch
protect the internal battery, an external battery (if
used), and the program set power-output circuitry.
IMPORTANT--removal of internal battery fuse will wipe out
the program and will require a site visit or replacement DCP.
The orange, 12VDC, 20-amp-hour gel-cell battery secured
in place at the end of the box powers the DCP. Do not
attempt to measure the battery voltage unless instructed
by ARS. Shorting the positive battery terminal to the
holder with the test lead could cause damage to the
circuitry or wipe out the program.
The desiccant indicator affixed to the battery holder
monitors the effectiveness of the desiccant. When the
desiccant is in good shape or "active," the color of the
circle matches that of the rectangleboth should be blue.
When the desiccant is spent, the circle color will be
pink. It is best to check the indicator immediately upon
opening the DCP door as the color will change in approxi-
mately two minutes.
All box closure clamps must be tightened to assure a good
fit. Do not overtighten the clamps.
The support card contains the battery charging circuitry,
system power supply, timer, and analog-to-digital converter.
This card is always located in card slot number 9. Card
slot number 1 is located closest to the battery.
The CPU card contains the microprocessor, memory, and
system firmware (operating system). This card is always
placed in slot number 8 between the aluminum plates which
act to shield it from interference.
The meteorological sensor card provides signal conditioning
for sensor inputs. It is here the transmissometer extinc-
tion analog signal is converted to a format that is usable
by the computer. For use in our system, this card is always
placed in slot #6. Two multi-color ribbon connectors
bring sensor signals from the input panel to the met cards.
Most DCPs have two pairs of ribbon cablessome may have
three pairs. The pair marked "telephotometer #1" or
"transmissometer," should be used with the shorter of the two
cables connected to the left met card cable input (battery at
top). The black conductor is on the left on both cables.
75
-------
GOES TRANSMITTER The GOES transmitter circuit board located on the inside
of the door enables the OCP to transmit data at precise
user-selected frequencies to the satellite. The transmitter
has the ability to broadcast at 265 frequencies between
401.701 and 402.0985 MHZ in 1.5 KHZ steps. The 10-watt
transmitter power output is +40 dBm.
PRIMARY CHANNEL There are six, square, red dial switches located in the
SWITCHES upper right corner (battery at top) of the GOES radio
transmitter circuit board. The top three switches, labeled
"CHAN 1", are used to set the primary radio frequency at
which the DCP will transmit. These switches should always
be set to the channel noted on the OCP sticker. When the
primary channel switches are set to 900, transmissions from
the DCP are hardware inhibited. This function is used to
field disable a DCP for shipping, or to ship a new DCP from
ARS to the field (described in detail in Section 7.2).
SECONDARY CHANNEL The secondary broadcast channel (CHAN 2) is not used in the
SWITCHES transmissometer monitoring network. These switches should
remain set to "000." The secondary channel is used in some
monitoring networks to broadcast random transmissions
when an emergency, such as a flood, occurs.
GRAY RIBBON The gray ribbon cable connecting the GOES radio to the
CONNECTOR CPU card should never be unplugged. The computer relies on
clock signals generated by an oscillator on the GOES radio
board for its operation.
IMPORTANT--disconnecting the gray ribbon cable will
destroy the internal program requiring a site visit by ARS
technicians or a replacement DCP.
8.7 DCP Antenna Component Descriptions
The antenna used with the Handar 540A DCP is a Cross-Yagi type with a
gain of lOdB. The antenna has a half-power beam width of 47°, which means
that critical alignment is not necessary. Refer to Figure 8-6 for location
of the components discussed.
ANTENNA The correct antenna alignment is documented on a DCP
ALIGNMENT sticker (Figure 8-7) located on the door of the DCP
enclosure. Antenna azimuth is expressed in degrees true;
elevation angle is given in degrees from horizontal.
ALIGNMENT CHECKS Antenna alignment, as well as physical checks of the
antenna, cable, and connectors, should be made period-
ically using procedures described in Section 7.6.
76
-------
BASE PLATE
VERSION #1
BASE PLATE
VERSION n
DRAIN HOLES
COAXIAL CABLE
CONNECTOR
DRIVER ELEMENTS
REFLECTOR
ELEMENTS
DIRECTIONAL
ELEMENTS
The base plate used in many installations is chrome plated
and adjustable in both the horizontal and vertical
directions. The plate is usually mounted to the shelter
with lag bolts or wood screws. The antenna bar screws to
this base.
Another type of base plate in use is designed for post
mounting. With this type of mount, antenna alignment is
a combination of the vertical component, adjusted with
two bolts at the base of the antenna rod, and the
rotational component adjusted with the two large Allen
screws which clamp to the post.
At the base of the antenna bar, on all but the oldest
units, are two holes which allow water that enters the bar
to drain. These holes should remain uncovered and should
be positioned towards the ground.
The coax cable from the DCP enters the antenna at this
connector. The connector should be oriented towards the
bottom of the bar if possible and should be screwed in
tightly to avoid moisture penetrating the seal and
degrading the signal.
The driver elements, located in the second position from
the bottom on both antenna models, are the elements that .
do all the work. For the transmissions to be strong enough
to reach the satellite reliably, all four elements must be
in good shape, and securely fastened in their holders.
These antenna elements function almost like a mirror
behind a light bulb, increasing the signal strength.
These antenna elements further increase the output
power, as well as make the signal more directional.
8.8 Air Temperature/Relative Humidity Sensor Description
Ambient air temperature and relative humidity are monitored with a
Handar Model 435A sensor. This .sensor combines both measurements within
one unit and is controlled by, and directly connected to, the DCP. The
temperature sensor measures temperature with a thermistor, an electronic
component whose resistance changes proportionally with temperature change.
The relative humidity sensor measures humidity with a humicap, a device
whose capacitance changes as its surface absorbs moisture.
77
-------
SENSOR HOLDER
SAMPLING
FREQUENCY
The sensor Is mounted In a white, parallel plate shield
that acts to dissipate heat and to protect the sensor.
The design assures that heat from the shield is not
conducted to the sensor causing errant, high readings.
Air temperature (°F) and relative humidity (0-100%)
measurements are taken once per hour at the same time
other measurements are made. Under routine monitoring
procedures, all sensors are scanned at 30 minutes past
each hour.
8.9 Solar Power System Component Descriptions
At some locations the receiver, transmitter, or both stations are
powered from a solar system with the following components: solar panels,
regulators, storage batteries, and interconnection cabling. The number of
solar panels is based on the estimated hours of sunlight available.
Transmitter stations will require at least two panels approximately 1.5'x 3'
t
in size. Most receiver stations can operate from one such panel.
SOLAR PANELS
SOLAR PANEL
OUTPUT
REGULATORS
Solar panels produce electric current when illuminated
with sunlight. Panels should be oriented towards true
south, and are inclined to angles that are most efficient
for winter operation (latitude plus 15 degrees). A coating
of dust or dirt on the glass surface will reduce collecting
efficiency; procedures to clean the panels are described
in Section 7.4.
The solar panels used in the transmissometer systems
produce approximately 18 volts when fully illuminated.
With the panel/regulator system connected to a battery, it
may be difficult to measure panel voltage output directly.
Procedures to trouble-shoot solar panel power systems are
described in Section 8.6.
Electrical current produced by the solar panels is used to
charge the storage batteries. A regulator prevents over-
charging of the batteries during extended periods of sunny
weather. Older systems have separate regulators housed in
small, metal enclosures within the shelter. Newer systems
have regulators mounted in the junction boxes on the back
of the panels.
78
-------
8.10 AC Line Power System Component Descriptions
At some locations the receiver, transmitter, or both stations operate
from an AC line power. As all instrumentation and data collection equip-
ment have the capability of operating from DC power, AC power is used to
charge batteries from which the instruments operate. An AC power system is
comprised of the following components: a surge protector, automatic battery
charger, and a deep-cycle storage battery. Because the AC charging system
can charge the battery, unlike a solar system affected by weather, only one
storage battery is required at each station.
RECEIVER SHELTERS Receiver shelters configured for AC power distribution
have at least two separate lines--each protected by its
own breaker; most shelters have three breakers. The extra
capacity was added during shelter construction so that
the shelter could accommodate additional equipment, if
needed, at a later date.
TRANSMITTER
SHELTERS
POWER USAGE
Transmitter shelters which are AC powered usually do not
have more than two breakers as the shelter's small size
prohibits the addition of more instrumentation.
The transmitter alone requires 2.7 amps at 12.6 volts DC
while in the "on" or "transmit" mode and 10 MA in the
"wait" mode (9.6 watts/hour). The receiver, DCP, and
strip chart recorder combined consume approximately 1.7
amps at 12.6 volts (21.4 watts/hour).
SURGE PROTECTORS Two versions of Northern Technologies' surge protectors
protect instruments from potentially-damaging power surges
One model has two system warning lights, the other has
three lights. The lights indicate the surge operating
condition of the protector, as described below:
Green
Light
The surge protector is in good operating condition,
Yellow The surge protector has sustained partial damage
Light as the result of a power surge, but is still
capable of providing protection.
Red The surge protector has sustained a massive power
Light surge and is no longer capable of providing
protection.
If the red light on either model surge protector is lit,
call ARS for a replacement unit.
79
-------
BATTERY CHARGERS
CHARGER NOISE
SURGES
Standard automobile-type, automatic trickle-chargers
charge batteries in both the transmitter and the receiver
shelters. Automatic chargers monitor the battery voltage
and discontinue charging when a fully-charged state is
reached to prevent damage from over charging. Replace
these units with chargers that are automatic only.
Battery chargers at the receiver stations have an easy
life so their meter needles will almost always be at zero
due to the low power requirements of the instrumentation.
On the other hand, chargers used at the transmitter will
have to output at least 2.5 amps while the transmitter is
running; this may cause the chargers to buzz. When a
battery is fully charged, the charger can be heard to turn
on and off approximately every two secondsthis is normal,
Most surges of a magnitude large enough to damage
instrumentation come from lightning striking near or on
power lines. Fluctuations in frequency or noise on the
line due to nearby machinery have no effect on the system
as the battery acts to minimize or negate these problems.
8.11 Storage Batteries System Description
Deep-cycle storage batteries at most locations power equipment at
both receiver and transmitter stations with both solar or AC line power
supplies. Deep-cycle batteries with their larger plate mass are needed at
the transmitter station. The equipment used at the receiver station does
not have the large cyclic power requirements of the receiver; therefore,
traditional lead-acid batteries are sufficient. Maintenance-free batteries
are not used because of the difficulty in assessing their state of charge.
This means that distilled water will need to be added to the batteries
periodically, usually only during ARS field technician site visits.
BATTERY NOISE During periods of full sunlight, batteries may produce
bubbling sounds. This is normal, and does not indicate
the regulator is malfunctioning. Newer solar panel
regulators charge the battery very slightly even when the
batteries are fully charged, as this has been found to
circulate electrolyte within the cells and avoid
stratification of the acid electrolyte. Charging of the
batteries can be heard most easily for.a period after the
transmitter turns off.
80
-------
EXPLOSIVE GASES
LOW BATTERY
FLUID LEVEL
BATTERY CHECKS
INTERCONNECT
WIRING
The bubbling heard when traditional lead-acid batteries
are charging is the production of hydrogen gas. If the
batteries are charged in a confined space, hydrogen and
oxygen gas may accumulate in proportions that may be
explosive. Transmissometer shelters should "breathe"
enough to avoid the accumulation of gasses during the
fall, winter, and spring. Vents are provided in each
shelter for removal during the summer as a precaution, as
well as to vent hot air. In any case, it is wise to
avoid smoking around lead-acid batteries, and to be aware
of the dangers associated with them.
A sudden drop in the level of battery fluid indicates a
possible problem with the battery or regulator. In most
cases, batteries should go for a full year without adding
fluid. Batteries in areas of high temperature and low
humidity may need filling at a slightly more frequent
interval. Only distilled water should be added to the
battery. This has been supplied to only a few locations
where freezing of the water is not a problem.
A hydrometer has been supplied to all locations to check
the charge of storage batteries. This need only be done
under the direction of ARS technicians.
All power wiring used to interconnect solar panels,
batteries, and terminal strips should be labeled at the
connectors. As a general rule with black and white
conductors, the black will be positive. With red and
black conductors, the red will be positive. On lamp
cord, the marked wire (usually by grooves) will be
positive. As with all electrical or electronic conductors,
it is important to verify correct polarity before
connecting to power; if unsure, call ARS for direction.
8.12 Support Equipment Descriptions
This section describes some of the equipment used in support of the
transmissometer monitoring system.
WINDOW GLASS
SPARE GLASS
The glass panes used in transmissometer shelters are
special high-quality, polished, flat stock with accurately
known, light transmittance properties. The transmittance
at 550 nm (green) is etched on a corner of the glass.
IMPORTANT--do not replace the supplied panes with glass
of a lesser quality--instrument readings will be affected.
At least one pane of spare glass should be stored in each
shelter. Notify ARS if spare glass is not supplied.
31
-------
WINDOW FRAMES
MOUNTING POSTS
RECEIVER
ADJUSTMENT BASE
TRANSMITTER
ADJUSTMENT
BASE
SERVICING
SUPPLIES
RECEIVER STATION
TOOL KIT
SPARE SHELTER
KEYS
RECEIVER
SHIPPING CASE
All but the earliest shelters are outfitted with standard
window frames: 6"x 6" glass (before framing) is used in
transmitter shelters, and 12"x 12" glass (before framing)
is used in receiver shelters. The window frame permits the
removal of glass pane from inside the shelter both for
operator convenience and more thorough cleanings. A wooden
strip and locking screw retains the pane in place. The
frame is also equipped with a second slot that allows for
the addition of an aluminum vandal plate.
Mounting posts used for both the transmitter and receiver
telescopes are made of large diameter steel pipes. To
further increase the mass, the post is filled with fine
sand. The extra mass makes the post less likely to move
the telescope as the post is heated and cooled. The posts
enter the shelter without touching the floor to further
isolate the instrument from movement due to shelter
vibration.
The alti-azimuth base used with the more alignment-
sensitive receiver telescope is supplied by Optec, Inc.,
the transmissometer manufacturer. It allows for easy, fine
adjustment while minimizing mis-alignment problems due to
base thermal expansion and contraction.
The alti-azimuth base used with the transmitter was
supplied by ARS. This low-cost base provides adequate
adjustment capabilities.
A list of the servicing supplies that should be stocked
in each shelter is included in Appendix I. Notify ARS
when supplies run low.
Tools needed to service instruments and equipment have
been provided. They should remain in the receiver
shelter.
Spare shelter keys are kept at ARS for each location. A
key has been hidden close to shelters in most locations.
Call ARS for information regarding spare keys.
Cases for shipping transmissometer components have been
supplied to all monitoring locations. The wooden receiver
computer case has dimensions of 15"x 21"x 18". The wooden
receiver telescope case has dimensions of 12"x 28"x 12"
(detector head must be removed for shipping). The trans-
mitter, control box and cable, and receiver detector head
are shipped in a gray, suitcase-style case. The original
strip chart box has been left at each site for shipping.
82
-------
LAMP CASES A small 9"x 12"x 5" black case has been supplied to hold
replacement transmitter lamps, as well as spent lamps
awaiting post-calibration. Cleaning supplies for the lamps
are also included in the case.
CALIBRATION Tripods for use in instrument calibration have been
TRIPODS stored at some monitoring locations. The tripods used
with the receiver telescope are large, Celestron (mfg.)
astronomy telescopes. Small Bogen tripods are used with
the transmitter and may also be stored at some locations.
33
-------
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A Transmissometer Measurements
APPENDIX B Transmissometer Data Examples
APPENDIX C List of Related Reading Material
APPENDIX D Satellite System Information
APPENDIX E Example of a Completed Transmitter Station Log Sheet
APPENDIX F Example of a Completed Receiver Station Log Sheet
APPENDIX G Transmissometer System Cable and Connector Description
APPENDIX H Servicing Supply List
84
-------
APPENDIX A
Transmissometer Measurements
The Optec, Inc., LPV-2 transmi ssometer measures the ability of the
atmosphere to transmit light. Light from the transmitter is collected,
measured, and compared to a pre-determined, user-entered calibration
number to determine the transmission coefficient. The calibration number
represents the reading in counts which would be measured if the atmosphere
between the transmitter and receiver allowed 100% light transmission.
With the calibration number dialed-in on the computer front panel, the
percent transmission (T(%)) is calculated by the receiver computer as
follows:
T(%) * Transmitter Measurement (Counts)
Calibration Number (Counts)
Transmission measurements are site specific because the measurement
is a function of the distance between the transmi ssometer transmitter and
receiver. Two related valuesextinction coefficient and visual range--
are distance- independent and can also be calculated and output by the
computer when the distance between the transmitter and receiver is user-
entered on the front panel. These two terms allow intercomparison of
visual air quality measurements from site-to-site.
The extinction coefficient, a measure of light loss per unit
distance, is expressed in units of inverse kilometers (km"1). The
receiver computer calculated the extinction (bext) as follows:
Bext C011") * -LN T(%) / 100)
Distance (km)
As the air gets dirtier, the transmission of light through the
atmosphere decreases and the extinction increases. The ability of the
transmi ssometer to measure high extinction (low light transmi ttance), is
limited by the instrument's ability to lock-on to the transmitter's chopped
light signal. Depending on the path distance and the transmitter light
output, the transmi ssometer can measure down to a 4% transmission level.
On the other end of the scale (clean air--low extinction), the lowest
measurable extinction is limited by the atmosphere rather than by the
instrument. The lowest extinction measurements occur under Rayleigh
atmospheric conditions (the theoretically clearest, possible atmosphere).
In a Rayleigh atmosphere, extinction measurements should not go below 0.010
km"1.
The extinction coefficient is a useful term, but one that may be
difficult to relate to our common experience. Extinction can, however be
easily converted to visual range. Visual range can be defined as the
distance at which a large, black object on the horizon just disappears
from view. If a contrast difference of 2% between the object and its
A-l
-------
background is used to define "just disappears from view," the visual
range (Vr) can be calculated as follows:
Vr(km) - 3.912 .
bext (km'1)
The relationship between extinction and visual range is illustrated in
Figure A-l.
Visual range should be thought of more as a measure of atmospheric
clarity than as an absolute distance. Keep in mind that the calculated
visual range is based on a transmission measurement of the air between
the receiver and transmitter.
The value shown on the receiver computer display (Al switch on
position B) is the extinction coefficient in units of inverse kilometers.
The receiver computer Al switch can be moved to the C position to display
the raw reading in counts, or to the Vr position to display the visual
range in kilometers. After viewing the display, the Al switch should
always be returned to the B position.
A-2
-------
1.CO
O.SO
0.60
X
Ol
CO
0.40
0.20
0.00
20
40 60 80.
VISUAL RANGE (KM)
100 120 140
Figure A-l. Bext vs. Visual Range.
A-3
-------
APPENDIX B
. Transmissometer Data Examples
The transmissometer receiver computer outputs readings to both the
strip chart recorder and the telemetered data collection platform (DCP).
Figure B-l below identifies information recorded on a strip chart.
Figure B-2 displays an example of plots made weekly at ARS to track the
operation of the transmissometer system.
Extinction signal Toggle signal
DCP Transmission Channel A, black pen Channel B, red pen
interference (every 3 hrs.) / Toggje Qff
(8.8 on scale)
>r i
Bext reading = 0.040
^
M
0.5 cm/hr
movemen
CHA Zero
(0.0 on Scale)
Toggle on
(9.8 on scale)
'aper length count.
Figure B-l. Example of Strip Chart Data.
B-l
-------
GRAND CANYON IRAN
.09 -
o
o
.07 -
06 -
.05 -
.04 -
.OJ -
02 -
01 -
00
223
224
229
226
J27
228
229
JULIAN DAY- 1988
Figure B-2. Example of Transmissometer Tracking Plot.
B-2
-------
APPENDIX C
List of Related Reading Material
Malm, W.C., 1983, Introduction to Visibility. National Park Service, Air
and Water Quality Division, Air Research Branch, June.
Malm, W.C., 1986, Comparison of Atmospheric Extinction Measurements Made bv
a Transmissometer. Integrating Neohelometer. and Teleradiometer. with
Natural and Artificial Black Targets. APCA International Speciality
Conference Proceedings (pgs. 763-782), Grand Teton National Park, WY.
National Environmental Satellite, Data, and Information Service National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, 1983, The Geostationary
Operational Environmental Satellite Data Collection System. Publication
NOAA--S/T 83/98
C-l
-------
APPENDIX 0
Satellite System Information
USE OF THE
SATELLITE
BROADCAST TIME
AND FREQUENCY
AMAZING
DISTANCES
SATELLITE
LOCATION
SATELLITE SYSTEM
CAPACITY
Use of the geostationary orbiting earth satellite
(GOES) is free to government agencies. The operation
of the satellite system and the authorization to use
the system is directed by the National Environmental
Satellite, Data, and Information Service (NESDIS) which
is a branch of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration (NOAA).
Each DCP is assigned (by NESDIS) a one-minute time slot
every three hours at a specified time to broadcast its
data. In addition, the broadcast must be made at a
defined frequency. Every DCP is also identified with a
unique platform "address," an 8-position, alpha-numeric
code.
The data collected in the field must travel quite a
distance before it arrives in Fort Collins, Colorado.
Data is transmitted approximately 23,500 miles up to
the satellite, 23,500 miles down to Wallops Island, 140
miles to Camp Springs, Maryland, and 1,500 miles to
Fort Collins, Colorado, for a total of approximately
48,640 miles per data transmission.
The GOES west satellite, used by locations west of the
Mississippi, is located at a longitude of 135° west,
directly over the equator. The GOES east satellite,
used by Eastern locations, is located at a latitude of
75° west, almost directly above Ecuador.
The relay of data from DCPs to the downlink facility is
a minor portion of the satellite's job. The primary
function is to provide weather-related data and images
to aid in forecasting. Each satellite is capable of
utilizing 233 frequencies for a total capacity of over
12,000 DCPs per hour. Data transmission rate is 100
baud (bits per second). The majority of the DCPs in
use throughout the United States help support early
warning flood'monitoring systems.
0-1
-------
APPENDIX I
Example of a Completed
Transmitter Station
Log Sheet
AtrRcsourcc - ., -
^Specialists. Inc location
-------
APPENDIX F
Example of a Completed
Receiver Station
Log Sheet
Air Resource
^Specialists. Inc
Location
TRANSMISSOMETER OPERATOR LOG SHEET
RECEIVER STATION
SrHttr T*f"p '*) Mm ^4*
Describe Weather & Haze Conditons: *
/**« (Pt*4*
READINGS
Before Align.' Time 1 ° :'£**" A K.
Vtf.f/kijgp.; TT«W iJLiii" AM.
Time Check: Trant"ntt»f UgN ON/OFF Q
Receiver Toggle Chg. ON/OFF
rnumrra ^FrnKir.c rAiM T^i?
A1-C,(0VR A2-SD,@ INT-1,^0
Ml« ₯ ? ritrrm~* 73
?O% aw«*C/**r 5CJA;
BiuHing ^.OMQ Tngg% nN/nff (?A<
a«v"ng ^.tfV^ , . Tn^gifnu/nn Qff
N Ttm«rH».MIW.«r) ll-Otf-.ff
Off Tim. (H».MIM.«T) // : 1 -J ' f fc
(~AI V2"^ r>KT W. X ^no,
)30, 60 Cycle -4H, 2H, (h)20M, 6
AUGNMCNT Mark initial location of light source with *
Initial
. Align and/or comment at needed.
Comments
o
ROUTINE PROCEDURES
YES NO
Sf D Alignment corrected
Q Q' Window dean upon arriving
H' Q Window deaned (if no. comment)
3^ Q Solar panels cleaned
YB
a
NO
\Z OV light "on" (if yes, call ARS)
SJ" D Strip chart marked
QT G Chart paper O.K.
G QT ChartpensOX
SKOAL PROCEDURES (Use only after receiving instructions from ARS)
O O Computer reset
n D Timereset
COMMENTS/SUmiES NEEDED ftto Pt* HA
fouTltot.t.10 ai*
iff A. At A t>U!Li*j* fl+lf
Enclose the anginal of this Log Sheet and send to:
Air Resource Specialists, Inc., 1901 Sharp Point Or., Suite E, Fort Collins, CO 80525,303/484-7941
IB/88
F-l
-------
APPENDIX G
Transmissometer System
Cable and Connector Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Function
BEXT
Signal
Raw Reading/
Stdcv. Signal
Toggle
Signal
BEXT
Ground
Raw Reading/
Sid. Ground
loggle
Ground
Not Used
Not Used
Shield
Wire
Color
Yellow
White
Orange
Green
Black
Brown
Bare
Wire
Color
Yellow
While
Orange
Green
Black
Brown
Bare
DCP
Input
Pin*
C
B
C
1
K
K
M
Mel
Card
Pin*
12-8
J2-14
J1-12
n-8
12-10
J2-10
DCP
Chassis/
Grd.
Input
Addrs
6
8
9
Pwr
Addrs
8
8
8
Full
Scale
1000
500
001
DCP
CH #
1
3
2 '
Comments:
1. Rec Output Cable - 6 ft. DCP Input Cable - 8 ft.; A1
determines Pin 1 output; A2 determines Pin 2 output.
2. Receiver outputs double ended; Handar DCP has
common ground.
3. DCP input pins not listed above
Wire Color - Wires Not Used
A - Blue, 11-19, (5.B)
D - Grey, |1-6. (D,B)
E - Red, J1-15, (A.B)
F - Purples, 12-9, (F,B)
H - Not used
Leave extra wire at terminal strip end - do not trim.
G-l
-------
Receiver computer
Output Connector
Pin No. Function Wire Color
1 AlSwitchableto: Yellow
Raw Reading, Bcxror V«
2 A2Switchableto: White
Raw Reading, Std. Deviation
3 Toggle Switch Orange
4 A1 Ground Green
5 A1 Ground Black
6 Toggle Ground Brown
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
9 Bare
Power Connector
Pin No. Function Win Color
1 Not Used
2 +12 Volt DC Black (Ribbed)
3 -12 Volt DC Black
4 Not Used
G-2
-------
APPENDIX H
Transmissometer Servicing Supply List
Transmitter and Receiver Stations
Receiver Station Transmitter Station
1. 3-ring binder 1. 3-ring binder
2. Log Sheets 2. Log Sheets
3. ARS mailing labels 3. Pens
4. Pens 4. Signal mirror
5. Kimwipes 5. Flashlight
6. Isopropyl alcohol 6. Max/min thermometer
7. Compressed air 7. Kimwipes
8. Window cleaner 8. Isopropyl alcohol
9. Paper towels 9. Canned air
10. Broom 10. Window cleaner
11. Dust pan 11. Paper towels
12. Signal mirror 12. Wisk broom
13. Flashlight
14. Max/min thermometer
15. Digital clock
16. Strip chart pens--black
17. Strip chart pensred
18. Strip chart paper
19. Spare fuses--5 amp
20. Spare fuses--! amp
21. Spare fuses--0.5 amp
22. Receiver station tool kit
H-l
-------
MONITORING FOR REASONABLY ATTRIBUTABLE IMPACT
OF LOCAL SOURCES AT
VOYAGEURS NATIONAL PARK
PETRIFIED FOREST NATIONAL PARK AND
MOOSEHORN WILDERNESS
Submitted to
Marc Pitchford
U.S. EPA
Environmental Monitoring Systems Lab
P.O. Box 15017
944 East Harmon
Las Vegas, Nevada 89114
Prepared by
AIR RESOURCE SPECIALISTS, INC.
May 5, 1988
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1
2.0 PETRIFIED FOREST NATIONAL PARK 2
3.0 VOYAGEURS NATIONAL PARK 6
4.0 MOOSEHORN NATIONAL WILDERNESS 8
5.0 CONCLUSIONS 9
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
2-1 Petrified Forest National Park - Initial Monitoring
View Southeast Toward Blue Mesa . 3
2-2 Petrified Forest National Park - Second Monitoring
View Southwest Toward Cholla Power Plant 4
2-3 Petrified Forest National Park - View of Layered Haze
on the Distant Horizon 5
3-1 Voyageurs National Park - 35mm Camera View 7
-------
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The IMPROVE Committee directed Air Resource Specialists, Inc. (ARS)
to install 8mm time-lapse and 35mm color-slide camera systems at Voyageurs
and Petrified Forest National Parks to access the possible visual air
-uality impact in class I areas by plumes from local sources. ARS personnel
traveled to Petrified Forest National Park with W. Malm, of the National
Park Service, to select and install the monitoring systems. W. Malm
traveled to Voyageurs to select the monitoring site; the equipment was
supplied and shipped by ARS. National Park Service personnel installed the
camera systems after phone conversations with ARS staff.
The IMPROVE Committee also directed ARS to provide an 8mm time-lapse
system for installation at Moosehorn National Wilderness. Bud Rolofson, of
the Fish and Wildlife Service, traveled to Moosehorn Wilderness to site the
8mm time-lapse system. The system was shipped to Moosehorn and installed bv
Fish and Wildlife personnel. No systematic, 35mm color-slide photography was
initiated at the Moosehorn site.
The following sections describe the collected data from each site.
-------
2.0 PETRIFIED FOREST NATIONAL PARK
The combined 8mm time-lapse and 35mm color-slide system began
operation on March 13, 1987. The system was installed with the 8mm and 35mm
cameras viewing the same sight path. The view was southeast overlooking the
length of the Park toward Blue Mesa. The system operated at this location
until July 31, 1987. Figure 2-1 is a photograph of the monitoring view.
During this time period, no visible plumes were recorded by either the
8mm time-lapse or 35mm slide systems. The IMPROVE Committee directed ARS to
move the monitoring systems to another location in the Park looking southwest
outside of the Park boundaries toward the Cholla Generating Station (a coal-
fired power plant located approximately 40 km from the Park boundaries).
The power plant is to the right of the center-of-view, located just over the
horizon and not directly visible in the photographic record. Figure 2-2 is
a photograph of the new monitoring vista.
The system operated until March 1, 1988. During this monitoring period,
no visible plumes were recorded entering National Park areas. Occasional
discoloration on the horizon was visible, but not readily identifiable or
traceable to any specific source. Figure 2-3 is an example of this distant,
elevated layer of haze. Thus, the IMPROVE Committee decided to discontinue
any further special photographic monitoring at Petrified Forest and directed
ARS to remove the equipment which was accomplished in early April 1988.
-------
Figure 2-1. Petrified Forest National Park
Southeast Toward Blue Mesa.
- Initial Monitoring View
-------
Figure 2-2.
Petrified Forest National Park - Second Monitoring View
Southwest Toward Choi la Power Plant.
-------
Figure 2-3. Petrified Forest National Park
the Distant Horizon.
- View of Layered Haze on
-------
3.0 VOYAGEURS NATIONAL PARK
The 8mm time-lapse system began operation on October 24, 1986, viewing
north across Kabetogama Lake. The nearest sources were approximately 30 km
west-northwest of the vista. The 35mm camera was sited by Park personnel to
view east through the Park to a more distant horizon feature. The new vista
has a more appropriate target for microdensitometry visual air quality
analysis. Figure 3-1 is a photograph of this monitoring view.
The systems were in operation until April 1988. During this period,
no distinct, easily-identifiable plumes were visible in either the 8mm time-
lapse or 35mm slide data. The IMPROVE Committee directed ARS to have Park
personnel discontinue operation of the camera systems as of April 20, 1988.
-------
Figure 3-1. Voyageurs National Park - 35mm Camera View.
-------
4.0 MOOSEHORN NATIONAL WILDERNESS
An 8mm time-lapse camera system
Wilderness. Due to difficult winter
The two locations are detailed below:
Location 1
October 5, 1987 -
Camera Location
Vista Photographed
has been in operation at Moosehorn
access, the camera was relocated.
Location 2
November 16, 1987 -
Camera Location
Vista Photographed
November 15, 1987
Magurrewock Mountain
Woodland Georgia Pacific Mill
Azimuth 264 degrees
February 14, 1988
Clearcut End of McConvet Road
Woodland Georgia Pacific Mill
Azimuth 292 degrees
The 8mm time-lapse has shown a visible plume being emitted from the
pulp mill nearly every day. The majority of the time, the plume appears to
cross over the Wilderness boundary. Since no 35mm photography is available,
the time-lapse film has been transferred to video tape which accompanies this
report. The camera continues in operation and film is being processed and
archived by ARS.
-------
5.0 CONCLUSIONS
Photographic monitoring at Petrified Forest and Voyageurs National
Parks for a period of one year has not been able to discern any identifiable
plumes entering class I areas. The photographic record has been archived
and the special monitoring discontinued as of April 1988 at both Parks.
Time-lapse monitoring of emissions from a pulp mill located near
Moosehorn Wilderness has identified many cases of visible plumes entering
the class I area. The 8mm time-lapse from October 5, 1987, to February 14,
1988, has been transferred to video tape for distribution with this report.
Photographic monitoring with the 8mm time-lapse camera continues.
-------
Appendix E
Transmissometer Data Collection and Processing
-------
TRANSMISSOMETER DATA COLLECTION AND PROCESSING
DAILY PROCEDURES
1. Every day the ground station at Wallops Island, Virginia, is inter-
rogated via modem for the data transmitted by the Data Collection
Platforms (DCPs). The communications package used is CROSSTALK. A
program called WALLOPS.EXE (or WALLOPS2.EXE) configures CROSSTALK and
initiates the call. The user is prompted for the name of a local file
in which to store the pulled data, and for the start date and time of
the data desired. The data pulled from the ground station are tagged
with the date and time received from the DCPs in GMT (Greenwich Mean
Time). These date and time tags are translated to standard local date
and time on a site-by-site basis when the data are appended to the
raw file. The output of step 1 is the Wallops data file.
2. The Wallops data file may contain information not pertaining to the data
desired. This information may concern solar eclipses, expected OCP
messages not received, DCP transmitting at wrong time, as well as non-
ASCII characters. The operator examines the Wallops data file for
errors, making corrections as necessary. The file is then stripped of
its header and message information, with the output .going to the
stripped Wallops data file; the program STRIP.EXE does this.
The program saves the header and message information in a message
file for printing and archiving. The operator keeps a written record
of the performance of each site, noting bad readings, weather incidents,
and operator problems.
3. The data in the stripped Wallops data file are now to be appended to the
raw transmissometer files using the program APPEND_T.EXE. There is
a raw transmissometer file for each site, and each is named as the 4-
character site code followed by _T. For example, the Grand Canyon file
is called GRCAJ". The APPEND_T.EXE program reads the stripped Wallops
data file, translates the GMT date and time to the standard date and time
local to the site being processed, and adds the data to (or overwrites
the data in) the raw transmissometer file for the site being processed.
The program keeps strict track of where it is adding or changing data.
The program will not allow data to be changed at the wrong record. The
program will add missing (coded 8) hourly records as necessary when
adding data past the end of the file. The program will code all data
that are added to, or changed in the file as 0. The raw transmissometer
file must always start on a seasonal boundary. The raw data are plotted
bi-weekly and posted for review by field personnel.
-------
SEASONAL PROCEDURES
1. At the end of a season all written documentation is analyzed to
determine dates and times when the instrument was down or when the
data were bad due to operator error. This information is included in a
special code file for each site. For example, the code file for Grand
Canyon is GRCA_C. The documentation is also examined for details
concerning lamp changes and periods when the lamp was off. This
information is included in a special lamp file for each site. For
example, the lamp file for Grand Canyon is GRCAJ.. The valid codes in
the code file are as follows:
0 Good data (default)
1 Operator error:
Flip Mirror
Alignment
etc.
2 Instrument down
8 Data acquisition error
Did not get data from Wallops Island
When the code file has been updated, the program ACODE_T.EXE is used to
update the codes in the raw transmissometer file according to those
listed in the code file. ACODE_T.EXE must be run for each site. The
raw transmissometer files are now the coded transmissometer files.
2. The coded transmissometer files may contain one-hour duration spikes of
bad data caused by the sun or other factors. This is not to be confused
with a weather episode which would normally last more than one hour.
If their amplitude is at least 15 times that of their neighbors, these
spikes will be coded bad data (code 2) when the program SINGLE_T.EXE is
run. SINGLEJT must be run for each site. The coded transmissometer
files are now the filtered transmissometer files.
3. The filtered transmissometer files must start on a seasonal boundary
for the averaging and seasonal plotting programs to operate correctly.
The program TFILL_T.EXE must be run for each site. TFILL_T.EXE fills
the filtered transmissometer files to the nearest seasonal boundary
specified by the operator with missing data.
4. The data in each filtered transmissometer file are next averaged to
create a new file called the average transmissometer file using the
program AVG_T.EXE. The average transmissometer file for Grand Canyon
is GRCAJ. AVG_T.EXE must be run for each site. AVG_T.EXE calculates
6-hour averages as follows:
times 1-5
6-11
12-17
18-23
-------
The program keeps track of the number of hourly readings that was
used to calculate each average. This number may be used later as
a validity code for the averaging process.
The average Bext, average relative humidity, average temperature,
average SVR, ana the number of points used in the average are written
to the average transmissometer file at times 5, 11, 17 and 23.
The average transmissometer file now undergoes the lamp drift correction
process. The Bext values are corrected for a lamp drift of 2% per 500
hours of lamp-on time. The dates and times and status of the lamp (ON
or OFF) must have been listed in the lamp file for each site. The lamp
file for Grand Canyon is GRCAJ.. The program LAMP_T.EXE uses this lamp
file to apply the correction to the Bext values in the average trans-
missometer file. The result is the corrected average transmissometer
file. This file also contains the lamp numbers that were included in
the lamp file. The algorithm used to make the lamp correction is as
follows:
Let xl = 16 number of minutes per hour the lamp is on.
Let x2 = 60 number of minutes in an hour.
Let x3 = 500 number of lamp-on hours for a 2% drift.
Then,
x3
yl * » 1875 number of actual hours for a 2% drift.
xl
x2
yi
y2 « - 312.5 number of 6-hour averages for a 2%
6 drift.
Let N be the number of 6-hour averages since the last lamp change,
Then,
N
y3 - 1 + 0.02( -)
1 1
y4 * - ( )ln( ) the factor to be added to
path distance y3 the Nth 6-hour average
Bext-
-------
6. The data in the corrected average transmissometer file may now be
plotted on a seasonal basis using TSUM_T.EXE, the transmissometer
seasonal summary program. This program uses information stored in a
special site data file TSITE.CON to determine if the site is an Eastern
or Western site. Eastern and Western sites are plotted on different
scales. The program allows linear or logarithmic scales on the y-axes,
while a linear scale is used on the x-axes. The cumulative frequency
calculations use the count method, ignoring data that falls below the
threshold for a particular site. This threshold is specified in
TSITE.CON for each site. The threshold for Western sites is typically
SVR = 13 km, while for Eastern sites it is SVR = 2 km. The program
allows the operator to choose the minimum number of points used in the
averaging process as a cutoff level. The default is 3. That is, any
average whose value was calculated using fewer than 3 points will be
ignored in the cumulative frequency and data recovery calculations.
"ranOaia.
-------
VJ
£ (/)
o
0)
a
recessing Ste
a.
Collect All Documentation
Field Notes. Phone Calls
Daily Notes
*
*-
II
2a
<0 £
J ffl
g <"
U
-
Coded Transmissometer
File
XXXX_T (XXXX = site)
/
\
Add Codes in _C File
Using
ACODE_T.EXE
/
a:
LLJ
(_
' ^ z rr
/
< 2 X o '
^3^
OC
H
(S]
(D
*
"
^
4*
£
15
+*
c
Q
^
Coded Transmissometer
File
XXXX_T (XXXX = site)
/
\
Code Singularity Spikes
as Bad Data (code 2)
using SINGLE.EXE
\ 1
fc
4-*
tf)
II
U) A
P U)X
leg
(0
1
H
X
X
X
X
ft
+*
£
Q
<
£
u
f-
i
X
<5 5
4} (A
0 II
$
i.-ix
fllJ-x.
£ I-
Jj X
S i
-
Corrected Average
Transmissometer File
XXXX_6 (XXXX = site)
/
3) 1
\
?
:
Correct the 6 Hour Average F
or 2%/5OO Hour Lamp Drift us
LAK/P_T£XE
\ /
(D j-*
S«i*
II
u. *
** V
?ix
S SX
ix
T3 .2
^* w X
KX
X
(I)
+w
«)
II
X
X
X
x
FINAL PLOTS
-
/
(
\
?
Plot the 6-Hour Average
Seasonal Summary Data usir
TSUM_T.EXE
\ /
"Z.
u
ui
*t-\p
&
$*
3
-------
TRANSMISSOMETER INSTALLATION DATES
SITE DATE
GRCA 12-18-86
CANY 12-19-86
PEFO 04-17-87
ACAD 11-12-87
ROMO 12-01-87
BADL 01-14-88
SHEN 03-09-88
FINN 03-23-88
SAGO NOT APPLICABLE
VOYA 06-18-88
BRID 07-19-88
YOSE 09-01-88
CRLA 09-01-88
MEVE 09-14-88
BAND 10-05-88
GUMO 12-01-88
BIBE 12-01-88
GLAC 01-20-89
CHIR 02-17-89
TONT 04-19-89
"ranOata. Joi';
-------
TRANSMISSOMETER QUALITY ASSURANCE NOTES
A transmissometer quality assurance (QA) program is currently under
development. The purpose of the QA program is to assure that all
transmissometer data are of known and sufficient quality to meet the
monitoring objectives of the IMPROVE program. Transmissometer data
quality--its accuracy, precision, completeness, representativeness and
comparability--will be assured by implementing a system of principles,
practices, methods, guidelines, and procedures that are applicable to the
monitoring program and its individual components.
Development of the overall QA program is underway. Standard operating
procedures and field operator manuals have been developed, published, and
distributed to each of the sites, the IMPROVE Committee and other visibility
scientists. These documents contain information on:
o System design;
o Installation considerations;
o Operational characteristics;
o Field operator procedures; and
o Calibration of the transmissometer systems.
Current work is focusing on formalizing the procedures developed during
the past eighteen months to handle routine and emergency maintenance of the
transmissometers and related system components in a swift, cost-effective
manner. A draft maintenance procedures manual is in preparation. These
procedures will then be implemented and tested in the routine operation of
the transmissometer network started in March 1989.
Procedures to verify the precision and accuracy of the transmissometer
and transmissometer data collection systems will be formulated through a
comprehensive instrument and systems testing experiment currently underway at
-------
the test site in Fort Collins, Colorado. The major areas to be thoroughly
investigated include:
1. Calibration Procedures
- Determination of optimum calibration path distance
- Evaluation of electronic receiver sensitivity
- Evaluation of calibration aperture size
- Beam intensity reduction with neutral density filters
- Consistency of lamp calibration between changes
2. Instrument Performance Tests
- Transmitter beam - uniformity of illumination
- Transmitter beam - stability of intensity
- Transmitter - effects of temperature on operation
- Receiver detector - uniformity of response
- Receiver - effects of temperature on operation
3. System Performance Tests
- Window cleanliness and aging
- Telescope alignment
- Data retrieval
- Distance measurements
- Gain adjustments
4. Operational Improvement Tests
- Effect of heated windows
- Effect of distorted windows
- Evaluation of flip mirror position indicator
- Evaluation of standard deviation measurements
- Evaluation of window cleaning techniques
- Evaluation of various window/hood designs.
5. Data Analysis and Reporting Procedures Tests
These tests will provide the remaining information necessary to complete
the QA program documents. A completed, verified, and operational QA program
will be in place by December 1989.
(TransQA.Not)
-------
Appendix F
Status of IMPROVE and National Park Service
IMPROVE Protocol Optical Monitoring Networks
-------
STATUS OF IMPROVE AND
NATIONAL PARK SERVICE IMPROVE PROTOCOL
OPTICAL MONITORING NETWORKS
Prepared for the
IMPROVE STEERING COMMITTEE
Prepared by
AIR RESOURCE SPECIALISTS, INC.
1901 Sharp Point Drive, Suite £
Fort Collins, Colorado 80525
November 30, 1988'
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1
2.0 PHOTOGRAPHIC SYSTEMS 3
3.0 NEPHELOMETER SYSTEMS 4
4.0. TRANSMISSOMETER SYSTEMS 5
4.1 Deployment 5
4.2 Operational Status 5
4.3 Standard Operating Procedures 7
4.4 Data Reporting 7
4.5 Transmissometer Testing . 10
APPENDIX A A-l
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
4-1 Grand Canyon National Park Transmissometer
Data Summary 9
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1-1 National Visibility Monitoring Networks 2
4-1 Transmissometer Network Description 5
-------
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The IMPROVE and National Park Service (NPS) IMPROVE PROTOCOL visibility
monitoring networks consist of a combined 37 sites. Table 1-1 lists these
sites by network. Monthly Progress Reports have been issued since March
1987 discussing detailed design, installation, development, and operation of
these networks. The.foil owing sections present summaries of the current and
projected status of the optical monitoring program. The major emphasis will
be placed on the transmissometer systems. Monthly Progress Reports contain
up-to-date information on the history of the installation, testing, develop-
ment and operation of all the optical monitoring equipment at each site; they
should be referred to for specific questions pertaining to any particular
monitoring location.
-------
TABLE 1-1
NATIONAL VISIBILITY MONITORING NETWORKS
IMPROVE
1. ACADIA NATIONAL PARK
2. BIG BEND NATIONAL PARK
3. BRYCE CANYON NATIONAL PARK
4. BRIDGER WILDERNESS
5. CANYONLANDS NATIONAL PARK
6. CHIRICAHUA NATIONAL MONUMENT
7. CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK
8. DENALI NATIONAL PARK
9. GLACIER NATIONAL PARK
10. GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
11. GREAT SMOKY MOUNTAINS NATIONAL PARK
12. JARBIDGE WILDERNESS
13. MESA VERDE NATIONAL PARK
14. MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK
15. ROCKY MOUNTAIN NATIONAL PARK
16. SAN GORGONIO WILDERNESS
17. SHENANDOAH NATIONAL PARK
18. TONTO NATIONAL MONUMENT
19. WEMINUCHE WILDERNESS
20. YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK
NPS IMPROVE PROTOCOL
21. ARCHES NATIONAL PARK
22. BADLANDS NATIONAL PARK
23. BANDELIER NATIONAL MONUMENT
24. GREAT SAND DUNES NATIONAL MONUMENT
25. GUADALUPE MOUNTAINS NATIONAL PARK
26. HALEAKALA NATIONAL PARK
27. HAWAII VOLCANOES NATIONAL PARK
28. ISLE ROYAL NATIONAL PARK
29. LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK
30. NATIONAL CAPITAL REGION-CENTRAL
31. PETRIFIED FOREST NATIONAL PARK
32. PINNACLES NATIONAL MONUMENT
33. POINT REYES NATIONAL SEASHORE
34. REDWOOD NATIONAL PARK
35. VIRGIN ISLANDS NATIONAL PARK
36. VOYAGEURS NATIONAL PARK
37. YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK
-------
2.0 PHOTOGRAPHIC SYSTEMS
Eventually all 37 sites will have automatic 35mm camera systems.
Photographs are taken three times daily at 0900, 1200. and 1500 hours. At
monitoring locations where transmissometers are not installed and appropriate
horizon target features exist, Kodachrome 25 slides are scanned with a micro-
densitometer to estimate Standard Visual Range (SVR). At sites with trans-
missometers, the photographic monitoring is designed to document the effect
of changing visual air quality on a specific scenic vista within the class I
area.
Photographic Monitoring has not yet begun at three locations:
Denali National Park (DENA)
National Capital Region-Central (NACC)
Virgin Islands National Park (VIIS)
DENA has had a camera at the Park for the past two years, but has
operated the system unsuccessfully. The NACC camera will be installed
during the second week of December 1988. Installation of the VIIS system
is on indefinite hold as directed by the National Park Service.
Photographic data from the networks have been collected and analyzed
on a regular basis from the beginning of the project. Some locations
conduct monitoring only during the summer and fall seasons due to severe
winter weather.
Standard operational, quality assurance, and data processing procedures
have been in effect for the entire project period. Photographic-derived SVR
data are released through the National Park Service as Seasonal Summary
Reports. The data are archived in the National Park Service optical
monitoring database. Detailed site discussions of the photographic
monitoring program are available in the Monthly, Progress Reports, quarterly
Seasonal Summary Reports, and the Photographic Systems Standard Operating
Procedures Manual.
-------
3.0 NEPHELOMETER SYSTEMS
Two locationsGreat Smoky Mountains and Mount Rainier National
Parkswill use nephelometers to monitor atmospheric scattering. Measure-
ments from the EPA Eastern Fine Particle Network nephelometer located at
Look Rock, Great Smoky Mountains, will be collected for inclusion into the
optical monitoring database. A nephelometer will be installed at Mount
Rainier in late 1989. This nephelometer is currently being used in a
special study, and will not be available for installation until then.
-------
4.0 TRANSMISSOMETER SYSTEMS
Table 4-1 lists the twenty-two locations that have been chosen to
receive transmissometers (14 IMPROVE and 8 NPS IMPROVE Protocol). The
distribution of the transmissometer systems within the networks was
designed to achieve geographic, meteorological, and visual air quality
diversity. The first two years of this program have been devoted to:
o Deploying the transmissometers;
o Testing the operation of the systems under widely varying
real-world conditions;
o Developing and implementing standard operating procedures; and
o Designing standard data editing and reporting protocols.
The goal is to have an operational network of transmissometers by
March 1, 1989. The network would then collect high quality atmospheric
extinction data for the final year of the contract.
4.1 Deployment
The primary effort has been to deploy the transmissometer systems
as quickly as possible during the first two years of the program. To
accomplish this, installation of the systems was given the highest priority
at the expense of allowing equipment to fail and not be immediately repaired,
This resulted in occasional inoperative systems for extended periods of time.
Table 4-1 lists the deployment dates of the eighteen units installed
as of December 1, 1988. Two more systems will be installed by February
1989. Due to major fires this year in Yellowstone National Park, the
instrument will not be installed until Summer 1989. The Hawaii transmis-
someter will not be installed until further review of the ability of the
transmissometer to operate over the 35 km path length available at this
location.
4.2 Operational Status
Table 4-1 lists tne projected dates for routine operation of each
transmissometer. These dates are considered to be the time of final system
configuration for regular data collection. Many of the instruments have
been installed in harsh and quite unique environments resulting in major
advances in our understanding of the operational characteristics of the
transmissometer systems. Return trips to these sites for re-configuration,
re-calibration, re-furbishing, and operator re-training are in progress.
Ten sites will be considered fully operational as of December 1, 1988.
Eight sites will be visited between December 1, 1988, and March 1, 1989, to
bring them to fully operational status. Two transmissometers will be
installed during February 1989. This will result in a network of twenty
ooerational transmissomstsr: startina March 1. 1989.
-------
TABLE 4-1
TRANSMISSOMETER NETWORK DESCRIPTION
LOCATION NETWORK
1. Acadia IMPROVE
2. Badlands PROTOCOL
3. Bandelier PROTOCOL
4. Big Bend IMPROVE
5. Bridger IMPROVE
6. Canyon!ands IMPROVE
7. Chiricahua IMPROVE
8. Crater Lake IMPROVE
9. Glacier IMPROVE
10. Grand Canyon IMPROVE
11. Guadalupe PROTOCOL
12. Hawaii Volcanoes PROTOCOL
13. Mesa Verde IMPROVE
14. Petrified Forest PROTOCOL
15. Pinnacles PROTOCOL
16. Rocky Mountain IMPROVE
17. San Gorgonio IMPROVE
18. Shenandoah IMPROVE
19. Tonto IMPROVE
20. Voyageurs PROTOCOL
21. Yellowstone PROTOCOL
22. Yosemite IMPROVE
INSTALLATION DATE
11/14/87
01/15/88
10/07/88
12/01/88
07/22/88
12/20/86
Feb-89
09/02/88
02/05/88
12/20/86
11/18/88
1989
09/16/88
04/18/87
03/25/88
12/02/87
04/29/87
03/04/88
Feb-89
06/17/88
1989
08/19/88
OPERATIONAL DATE
03/01/89
12/01/88
12/01/88 .
12/01/88
12/01/88
01/01/87
03/01/89
03/01/89
03/01/89
09/01/87
12/01/88
1989
12/01/88
09/01/87
12/01/88
03/01/89
03/01/89
03/01/89
03/01/89
03/01/89
1989
12/01/88
-------
As documented in the Monthly Progress Reports, much has been learned
about the failure modes and operational characteristics of the transmis-
someters. Procedures are being developed to quickly handle instrument
malfunctions in the operational network. Data collected from the date of
installation to the assigned operational date will be processed and included
in the optical monitoring database. These data will be flagged as collected
during the testing period of the instrumentation. The data collection
efficiency during these interim periods will be lower than after the systems
reach operational status.
In general, systems installed in the Southwest have been and are
expected to continue operating with a higher data collection efficiency
than in the North and East.
4.3 Standard Operating Procedures
Standard operating procedures and field operator manuals have been
developed, published, and distributed to each of the sites, the IMPROVE
Committee and other visibility scientists. These documents contain
information on:
o System design;
o Installation considerations;
o Operational characteristics;
o Field operator procedures; and
o Calibration of the transmissometer systems.
Current work is focusing on formalizing the procedures developed during
the past eighteen months to handle routine and emergency maintenance of the
transmissometers and related system components in a swift, cost-effective
manner. A draft maintenance procedures .manual is in preparation and expected
to be distributed to the IMPROVE Committee by January 15, 1989, for review.
These procedures will then be implemented in the routine operation of the
transmissometer network by March 198S.
4.4 Data Reporting
The transmissometer calculates and reports average atmospheric
extinction over the path length of tne instrument. The data are recovered
daily from satellite data collection olatforms. Along with extinction,
ambient temoerature and relative humidity are also monitored. The data
represent one ten-minute average value for each hour. The measurement
interval begins three minutes after the hour. After collection and editing
(only removing times when the monitoring equipment was malfunctioning), the
data are reduced to six-hour average values. The time periods of the four
daily six-hour average values are:
1 - 0000 to 0500 hours
2 - 0600 to 1100 hours
3 - 1200 to 1700 hours
4 '- 1800 tc 2300 hours
-------
The number of valid ten-minute averages in each six-hour average is
recorded and kept in a database.
Data editing consists of removing measurements when the system was
known to be inoperative or delivering questionable data due to non-standard
operational parameters noted by on-site operators on the Log Sheets. These
conditions include optical misalignment, unknown window transmission due to
exceptionally dirty, broken, or missing window glass, or questionable data
logging and transmission.
The data will be released in quarterly Seasonal Summary Reports.
Figure 4-1 is an example of the Fall 1988. seasonal summary for Grand
Canyon National Park. The report contains data collected from September
1, 1988, through November 22, 1988. The final version of this report will
contain data for the entire season. The Appendix A contains draft Seasonal
Summary Reports for all transtnissometer data collected at the Grand Canyon
from December 1986 to November 1988.
The top graph is a time line of all the collected six-hour average
values. The dashed line at an SVR of 13 km (bfixt=0.3 km"1) represents an
optical depth of the transmissometer sight patn of approximately 2. When
the optical depth reaches this value, the error in measured extinction
becomes relatively large. When box^. is greater than 0.3 km, the time
line becomes dashed indicating an"increased uncertainty in the measurement.
The next graph presents a time line of six-hour average relative
humidity measurements. This allows rapid determination of the effect of
increasing relative humidity on measured bex^. Long periods of relative
humidity near 100% can be seen in the reports in the Appendix A. This
usually results in corresponding periods of high bgx^. This probably is
associated with precipitation events. This assumption can only be verified
by reviewing simultaneous photographic data.
The bottom plot is a rank-ordered cumulative frequency plot of six-
hour average extinction values. The 10% to 90% values are plotted in
10% increments. All extinction values greater than 0.3 km"5 are placed into
one bin at this level. The 10%, 50%, and 90% values are listed to the
right of the plot.
The listing at the bottom contains data recovery statistics for the
season.
A database will be developed to contain all bext, ambient temperature,
and relative humidity six-hour average values. The number of 10-minute
values in each six-hour average will be listed. All raw data will be kept
in ASCII files by site.
8
-------
UJ
o
400
300 -
200 -
150 -
ion -
5
50 H
a
ec
<
o
z
13 -I
10
1
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
Tronsmissometer Data Sur-mary 6 Hour Averages
September 1, 1988 - November 30, 1988
10 20
SEPTEMBER
10 20
OCTOBER
31
10 20
NOVEMBER
30
.009
.017
.019
0?5 ^
- .038 6
o
.078 ==
- .300
.391
SUNOARO VISUAL RANGE FREQUENCY Of OCCURRENCE
10 20 30 40 50 60 7C
CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY (*>
"?
UJ
O
Z
CE
jf
D
O
If
<
z
I/I
300 -
200 -
150 -
100 :
-
50 -
"
-
_
^
x "
X X
X X
X ...
X
X -.
: v-
80 90
.009
.012
- .019
.025 ~
i
038 §
.078 §
.300
.391
"ext
SVR
10 .059 66
50 .029 131
90 .019 199
FOR A GIVEN
% OF THE TIME.
THE SVR IS
LESS THAN OR
EQUAL TO THE
CORRESPONDING
SVR VALUE.
TRANSMISSOWETER OATi RECOVERY STATISTICS
CATEGORY
TOTAL POSSIBLE 6-HOUR AVERAGES
USABLE 6-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE 1
'; THE TIME PERIOD
nv'E PERIOD
NUM
364
328
Z
100
90
Figure 4-1. Grand Canyon National Park Transmissometer Data Summary,
-------
4.5 TRANSMISSOMETER TESTING
A comprehensive examination and testing program for the transmissometer
system is planned to begin in January 1989. The tests will take place at
Ft. Collins, Colorado. Four major areas will be investigated:
1. Calibration Procedures
- Determination of optimum calibration path distance
- Evaluation of electronic receiver sensitivity
- Evaluation of calibration aperture size
- Beam intensity reduction with neutral density filters
- Consistency of lamp calibration between changes
2. Instrument Performance Tests
- Transmitter beam - uniformity of illumination
- Transmitter beam - stability of intensity
- Transmitter - effects of temperature on operation
- Receiver detector - uniformity of response
- Receiver - effects of temperature on operation
3. System Performance Tests
- Window cleanliness and aging
- Telescope alignment
- Data retrieval
- Distance measurements
- Gain adjustments
4. Operational Improvement Tests
- Effect of heated windows
- Effect of distorted windows
- Evaluation of flip mirror position indicator
- Evaluation of standard deviation measurements
- Evaluation of window cleaning techniques
- Evaluation of various window/hood designs.
The above is only a brief outline of this intensive test program. A
detailed test plan is in preparation and will be distributed in early
January 1989. The goal of the test program is to create a quality assurance
and performance standards document for the transmissometer system.
10
-------
APPENDIX A
DRAFT SEASONAL SUMMARY REPORTS FOR
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
DECEMBER 1986 THROUGH NOVEMBER 1988
A-l
-------
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
Transmissometer Date Summary 6 Hour Averages
December ', '536 - February 28, 1S87
o
o:
0
o:
<
0
400 -i
300 -
200 -
1 50 -
100 -
-
e« ^
00 -'
17
1 0 -
r~
10
1
20
\
i
r
31
m
»
;
i
1 f
1C
1
if i
H
\
.
i
j
20
i if
uy
L
\
3
1
n/l/l
i 1,
J
l
10
\
L
rJ
I
p
' 'I
«
I
I
': =
0 28
- 012
- 01 Q
- 025
- 03fl P
E J
>- 078 >-
» 21
LU
-
- TOD
100 -J
80 -J -
60 -
40 -
20 -
0 -
DECEMBER
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE
<
tuo
T,nr.
juu -
}nn -
/uv
i ^n -
1 3U
1 nn -
en
2(J -
X
v . x '....:
X :
x
X
y
.uua
K- 01 ">
- m Q
_ noc. ^~«
. u/o _
i
L. n^fl £
^ jt
_ mn
- .u/o *
T*
.
SVR
50
90
!021 180
.013 286
FOR A GIVEN
% OF THE TIME.
THE SVR IS
LESS THAN OR
EQUAL TO THE
CORRESPONDING
SVR VALUE.
cr
!:1
10 20 30 40 5C £: 70
CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY r.}
80 90
.300
.391
TRANSMlSSOwrER DATA RECOVERY STATISTICS
CATEGORV NUM
TOTAL POSSIBLE 6-HOU= AVERAGES IN' THE TIME PERIOD 350
USABLE 5-HOUR AVERAGES :%. Tw" TIME DERIOD '9-i
100
A-2
-------
GRAND CAN'YON NATIONAL PARK
Transmissometer 3c;c Summary 6 Hour Averages
March :, '987 - May 31, 1987
*uu -
300 -
j" 200 -
< 100 -
ec -
<
| 50 -
o
a:
o
2
10
13 -
1
^ 30 -
iS 60 -
= 40 -
K 20 -
0_
n A JIJ i, vV
] j I i \ J I II
f 1
1 1
1
10 20 31 10 20 30 10 20 31
MARCH APRIL MAY
rilj yjj | L. 1 l£
A / lit 1 1 j\ f liu n\ili' iW I
j«ivtfj Mfjifv S^l/i til j^ In ' / (/^l fJi^jl/ftN lAwVli JA//
/ Tv« wr^Hr ^"M\WU' 'r>virL_A -fji/L, nWi lyvVv MJUVk ' V' n.^r'M.
"^^V^ I »V
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE 7. b SVR
^ 30° -
i 200 -
£ 150 -
< ~
| 50 -
13 -
1 n
,
₯ x x _
' ' x "x
X x
x :
X
1C 2C 3C 40 5C 5: 7C 80 90
CUMULATIVE rREOl'ENCY (Z)
TRANSM.'SSOMETtR DATA RECOVERY STAT1S
012 10 .177 22
* 50 .031 123
-0ig 90 .022 172
.025 -^
I. FOR A GIVEN
.038 J % OF THE TIME,
-^ THE SVR IS
§ LESS THAN OR
.078 = EQUAL TO THE
^ CORRESPONDING
= SVR VALUE.
X
u.
.30C
.39'
TICS
CATEGOR% NUM r.
TOTAL POSSIBLE P-HC-JS AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD 355 ioc
USABLE 6-HOUR AVERAGES '', THE TIME PERIOD '1C 29
- .012
- .019
- .025
; .038
- .300
1Q 1
«
x
UJ
A-3
-------
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
Transmissometer Date Summary 6 Hour Average's
June 1. 1937 - Auaust 31, 1957
400 -
300 -
T 200 -
o
< 100 ;
g :
| 50 -
o
K
0
2
(/l
13 -
. .
Pin jite
i vi r ill I
I A
f
i
; |
1 10 20 30 10 20 31 10 20 31
JUNE JULY AUGUST
1 UU
^ so -
£. 60 -
= 40 ^
* 20 -
I jJ.i _ M
n /j V i\j[|«\i ijwiijr- 1 Mi
A/ 1 /LJl 'vWi' !r ^wl f ''It1
JC u ^iJ\ nxIS viillF T Vi« ^"J 1 1 V IfllU 'j Iisr1.
^/v/ *wi"iY L^ft^AnA^1^ T1" 'rAft^WV^ '' "W ^^ ^"
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE ?. b SVR
,r\r, nnn -"'
^ 300 -
7
£ 15°-
£ 100 -
' I!
| 50 -
<
5
&
13 -
1 n .
_ n., 10 .046 83
X ^ 50 .021 180
v X x niq 90 .014 267
A x-s
v x' - .025 _
i FOR A GIVEN
p .038 _£ % OF THE TlMt.
x ^ THE SVR IS
I § LESS THAN OR
- r>7fl :r EQUAL TO THr
i_ 5 CORRESPONDING
! = SVR VALUE.
~ X
-
1C 20 30 40 5C 60 70 80 90
CUMULATIVE rREOUENCY (r.)
TRANSMISSOMETER DATA RECOVERY STATISTICS
CATEGORX NUV '
TOTAL POSSIBLE 6-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD 366 100
'JSASLE 5-HOUR AVERAGES ".' TH" r\V~ °rR!OD ' 5E i~
- .019
- .025 ^
- .038 £
~ JC
O
~ -078 g
2
H-
x
UJ
- .300
- 391
A-4
-------
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
Transmissomete' Date Summary 6 Hour'Averages
Septembe' 1, :9£7 - November 30, 1987
«HJU -
300 -
J 200 -
o
< 100 -
ce.
<
| 50-
o
a:
o
z
13 -
1 n _
.j
1
i no
_ 80 -
*« 60 -
= 40 -
E 20 -
\
J
inn -,
_ 300 -
J, 200 -
£ 150 -
< 100 -
1 5o:
in
13 -
1 P
"J
1
iv JL ji rfi....i
M ^ AIR v ^ '"I* I'w
i jil L M i
v M '
1 11
ifcjyjrUi
. ...i....f Si
iJ_L__lL
1
1
: ; ; T .
10 20 30 1C 20 31 10 20 30
SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER
.... . /M 14. .r.ir'...;.iy.:h,..i..j, LM .
: 'i^ '.. JTI f\i J . ..M yj ...M.
h: rn P * FT H.rc kbi r iyrr:~:~im?in wrr:
^ JrhLJ. HJ.L .^ ' TW -M
i/1*^ 1""«V/ w »ft^rr '
- .012
- .019
- .025 ^
- .038 5
I *
o
- -078 g
2
x
UJ
- .300
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE FREQUEKCV OF OCCURRENCE 7. b . SVR
nne\ . £*'
Y x
y X
x.. x.
X
x
,. ,
. Q12 10 .078 50
50 .022 172
- .019 90 -013 286
- .025 C
' FOR A GIVEN
- .038 J 7. OF THE TIME,
~ THE SVR IS
I § LESS THAN OR
- 078 ?= EQUAL TO THE
a CORRESPONDING
= SVR VALUE.
- x
UJ
- .300
TO A
10 20 30 *C 50 6: 70 80 90
CUMULATIVE FREOUEKCV (T.)
TRANSM!SSOWrE=! DATA RECOVERY STATISTICS
CArEGORv NUM T.
TOTAL POSSIBLE ?-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD 36* ioc
USABLE 5-HOU" AVERAGES I.1. THE TIME ?ERiOO 22« 99
A-5
-------
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
Transmissometer Date Summary 6 Hour Averages
Decembe- 1, 1957 - February 29, 1988
400 -
300 -
J 200 -
w 15° '
o
< 100 ;
<
| 50 -
IE
O
z
to
13 -
{& '"I 1 "r ' " / /" ^ jll "
/h 1 1 1 1 f ] ' *Vj\
V | ]|
1 i 1 >f
i i
j ; 1
- i :
1 10 20 31 10 20 31 10 20 29
DECEMBER JANUARY FEBRUARY
_ 30 -
«, 60 -
r 40 -
~ 20 -
(M ^ // f *.'* ./ ) r /Ln f 1 j^
i r 1. J ' k 1st Is" l/"^ J! 1 fl J ^ i / I !
irU WV '^ ' '' >ili k"^H/ '\r\fa fifiH^ iQl lln/ilU A lift J I
r \x r \' ^ \|
-------
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
"ransmissometer Data Summary 6 Hour Averages
March 1, 1988 - May 31, 1988
10 20
MARCH
31
10 20
APRIL
10 20
MAY
31
STANDARD V'SUAL RANGE FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE
SXl
SVR
* s
h
*»'
c
z
<
er
<
>
Q
^
<
(,-
»uu
300 - ....
7fifi _ ...
^UU -]
1 CO J y y. '
150 1 x *
X
inn ....
I UL' "
^
T
50 ^
^
-H
-j
i
IT J ....
in -i ,
" .UUS
1
V
A i_ nic
c L ^
I i
I n7B e
P .UOO ^
r~
r z
r 07a 2
O
[ |
i
r
i
... _ _ _ _ ^_ Tnn
L -tqi
10 .045 85
50 .024 158
90 .012 309
FOR A GIVEN
7, OF THE TIME,
THE SVR IS
LESS THAN OR
EQUAL TO THr
CORRESPONDING
SVR VALUE.
1C 2C
3C 40 50 60 70
CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY (%)
80 9C
TRANSMISSOMETER DATA RECOVERV STATISTICS
CATEGORY
TOTAL PCSSI8LE 6-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD
USABLE 5-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD
NUM
368
345
9f
/
100
93
-------
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
Transmissometer Data Summary 6 Hour Averages
June 1, 1988 - August 31, 1988
.009
r .025 ^
I
_*
g
o
.391
300
200
.2 50
o
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE FREQUENCV Or OCCURRENCE
(
.009
_.019
10 .046 S3
50 .031 123
90 .022 172
' FOR A GIVEN
Z 7. OF THE TIME.
- THE SVR IS
J LESS THAN OR
- .078 = EQUAL TO THE
y CORRESPONDING
= SVR VALUE.
x
13
10
1C 20
3C 40 50 60 70
CUMULATIVE FREQUENCY (T.}
80 90
.391
TRANSMISSOMETER DATA RECOVERY STATISTICS
CATEGORY
NUW
TOTAL POSSIBLE 6-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD 368 100
USABLE 6-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD 216 55
-------
300 -
E 200
jt
o
< 100
-------
Appendix G
Monthly Technical Progress Report
Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis Program
-------
MONTHLY TECHNICAL PROGRESS REPORT
VISIBILITY MONITORING AND DATA ANALYSIS PROGRAM
(NPS Contract CX-0001-7-0010)
For the Month of
February 1989
Prepared for the
NATIONAL PARK SERVICE
CIRA - Colorado State University
Foothills Campus West
Fort Collins, Colorado 80523
Prepared by
AIR RESOURCE SPECIALISTS, INC.
1901 Sharp Point Drive, Suite E
Fort Collins, Colorado 80525
March 9, 1989
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1
2.0 OPTICAL MONITORING NETWORKS: PROCEDURES AND
PROTOCOLS 4
2.1 Photographic Monitoring 4
2.1.1 Network Operations 4
2.1.2 Monitoring Equipment and Procedures . . 4
2.1.3 Data Analysis and Reporting 5
2.2 Transmissometer Monitoring 5
2.2.1 Network Operations 5
2.2.2 Data Analysis and Reporting 7
2.2.3 Transmissometer Testing 10
2.2.4 Transmissometer Procurement 11
2.3 Nephelometer Monitoring 12
2.4 NPS IMPROVE Computer System and Data Processing 13
2.4.1 Database Development 13
2.4.2 Computer Network Operations 13
3.0 IMPROVE NETWORK . 14
3.1 Site Status 14
3.1.1 Transmissometer Site Status 14
3.1.2 Camera Site Status 17
3.2 IMPROVE Schedules and Milestones 17
3.2.1 Field Service Schedule (March and April) 17
3.2.2 Task Schedules (March and April 1989) . 18
4.0 NON-IMPROVE SITES TO BE OPERATED ACCORDING TO IMPROVE
PROTOCOLS 19
4.1 Site Status 19
4.1.1 Transmissometer Site Status 19
4.1.2 Camera Site Status 21
4.2 Schedules and Milestones 21
4.2.1 Field Service Schedules 21
4.2.2 Task Schedules 21
5.0 AUXILIARY MONITORING SITES 22
5.1 Sites Status 22
5.2 Schedules and Milestones 24
5.2.1 Task Schedules 24
6.0 SCENES SITES 25
6.1 Site Status 25
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Cont.
Section Page
7.0 OTHER CONTRACT SUPPORT 27
7.1 Data/Equipment Requests 27
7.2 Winter Photographic Monitoring at Grand, Bryce,
and Glen Canyons 27
8.0 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 29
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
1-1 IMPROVE, IMPROVE Protocol, SCENES, NPS Auxiliary, and
BLM Auxiliary Monitoring Sites Supported through the
Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis Program . . 3
2-1 Example of Transmissometer Data Summary for Grand
Canyon National Park 9
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
2-1 Operational Transmissometer Network by March 1, 1989 7
3-1 Network Status IMPROVE Monitoring Sites as of
February 28, 1989 15
4-1 Network Status Non-IMPROVE to be Operated Under
IMPROVE Protocol Sites as of February 28, 1989. . . 20
5-1 Network Status Auxiliary Monitoring Sites as of
February 28, 1989 23
6-1 Network Status SCENES Monitoring Network as of
February 28, 1989 26
-------
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This Monthly Technical Progress Report summarizes the technical aspects
of the Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis Program (NFS Contract CX-Q001-
7-0010) performed during February 1989, and outlines project-related major
milestones and schedules for March and April 1989.
This contract was awarded to Air Resource Specialists, Inc. (ARS)
in March 1987, and work on the contract effectively began on April 1, 1987.
This is the twenty-second in a series of Monthly Technical Progress Reports.
Separate monthly financial reports are submitted directly to the Contracting
Officer and his representatives.
The Visibility Monitoring and Data Analysis Program supports the
National Park Service (NPS) and other cooperating agencies in: deploying,
operating, and maintaining four visibility monitoring networks; reducing,
analyzing, and reporting the results of collected view and electro-optical
monitoring data; and supporting the capabilities of the entire program
through enhancing instrumentation, monitoring, and analysis techniques.
The ^our monitoring networks ara:
o IMPROVE Network (Interagency Monitoring of Protected Visual
Environments). The IMPROVE program is sponsored by the National
Park Service, Forest Service, Fish and Wildlife Service, Bureau
of Land Management, and Environmental Protection Agency. Each
agency participates on the IMPROVE technical steering committee
which has the overall responsibility for the program. At the
direction of the committee, the NPS administers the operational
monitoring aspects of the program. The IMPROVE monitoring
network will consist of 20 monitoring sites. Each site will
ultimately be configured to monitor the optical properties and
aerosol constituents of the atmosphere through the use of
cameras, transmissometers, and fine particulate monitors.
o Non-IMPROVE to be Operated According to IMPROVE Protocol
Sites. In May 1985, the Subcommittee on National Parks and
Recreation conducted oversight hearings on air pollution effects
on units of the National Park System. As a result of the
hearings, Congress appropriated additional funds to conduct air
quality monitoring in 17 areas where no monitoring was being
-------
conducted. Monitoring will consist of a full complement of
visibility, ambient gasses, participate and meteorological
instruments. Visibility-related monitoring at each site will
ultimately include measurements of the optical properties and
aerosol constituents of the atmosphere through the use of
cameras, transmissometers and fine particulate monitors.
o SCENES Network (Subregional Cooperative Electric Utility Industry,
National Park Service, Department of Defense, and Environmental
Protection Agency Visibility Study). The objective of SCENES
is to gather data that will provide a better understanding of air
pollution source-receptor and cause-effect relationships. The
network has been designed to establish the relative contributions
that specific local sources have on air quality and visibility
degradation in the lower Colorado River Basin. Four NPS units are
included in the SCENES network. Two of these sites, Bryce Canyon
and Grand Canyon, are also IMPROVE sites. The NPS is responsible
for optical visibility monitoring at all SCENES' sites. Monitoring
could include cameras, teleradiometers, transm-issometers, particu-
late monitors and other experimental instrumentation, depending on
the objectives and design of SCENES intensive monitoring experiments.
o Auxiliary Monitoring Network. Visibility monitoring will be
performed throughout the 48 NPS class I areas and sites selected
by cooperating agencies to further identify visibility conditions
in regions of special interest, in areas where data are sparse,
or in areas with existing long-term records. Optical monitoring
will be performed with automatic cameras.
Figure 1-1 is a map of all current visibility monitoring sites supported
by this contract effort.
This Progress Report details the work performed during the past month,
and presents schedules and milestones for the next two months. General
operational procedures and protocols common to the networks are discussed in
Section 2.0. Network specific details are presented in Sections 3.0 through
5.0. Other contract support tasks are summarized in Section 7.0, and contract
administration details are presented in Section 8.0.
-------
PUERTO RICO - VIRGIN (SUNOS
SITE NAMES AND FOUR LETTER SITE ABBREVIATIONS BY NETWORK
:MPROVE SITES (9)
SITE ABRV SITE NAME
1. ACAC ACAOIA NP
2. 3IBE BIG BEND NP
3. 8RCN BRYCE CANYON NP *
i. BRIO BRIDGER W
5. CANY CANYONLANDS NP
-' 5. CHIR CHIRICAHUA NM
jT. CRLA CRATER LAKE NP
-3. 2ENA 3ENAL1 NP
9. 3LAT '3LACIER NP
- 10. 3RCT GRAND CANYON NP *
11. GRSH GREAT SMOKY MOUNTAINS NP
'12. JARS JARBIDGE W
13. MEVE MESA VERDE NP
/rU. MORA MOUNT RAINIER NP
15. SOMM ROCKY MOUNTAIN NP
y 15. SAGO SAN GORGONIO W
17. SHEN SHENANOOAH NP
' 18. TONT TONTO NM
19. WEMI WEMINUCHE W
20. rOSW YOSEMITE NP
SCENES SITES
SITE ABRV. SITE NAME
1. BRCN BRYCE CANYON NP
2. GLCA GLEN CANYON NRA
3. GRCT GRAND CANYON NP
4. LAME LAKE MEAD NRA
Also a SCENES site
Also an IMPROVE site
NON-IMPROVE SITES TO BE
OPERATED ACCORDING TO
IMPROVE PROTOCOL f*)
SITE ABRV. SITE NAME
AUXILIARY NPS SITES ()
SITLABRV.__SITE NAME
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
s!
7.
3.
g_
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
IS.
16.
17.
ARCH
BADL
BAND
GRSA
GUMO
HALE
HAVO
ISRO
LAVO
NACA
PEFO
FINN
PORE
REDW
VIIS
VOYA
YELL
ARCHES NP
BADLANDS NP
BANOELIER NM
GREAT SAND DUNES NM
GUAOALUPE MOUNTAINS NP
HALEAKALA NP
HAWAII VOLCANOES NP
ISLE ROYALS NP
LASSEN VOLCANIC NP
NATIONAL CAPITAL
REGION
PETRIFIED FOREST N0
PINNACLES NM
POINT REYES NS
REDWOOD NP
VIRGIN ISLANDS NP
VOYAGEURS NP
YELLOWSTONE NP
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3,
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
21.
3URI
CACA
CARE
CAMO
CHCt!
COLM
CRMO
OEVA
OINO
GRTE
GRBA
JOTR
LABE
MOOS
NOCA
OLYA
SAGU
THRO
WICA
ZION
.NETWORK
-------
2.0 OPTICAL MONITORING NETWORKS: PROCEDURES AND PROTOCOLS
This section summarizes important actions related to general opera-
tional procedures and protocols common to all networks; it emphasizes
instrumentation, operations, quality assurance, and reporting. Site-by-
site discussions are presented in sections devoted to the individual
monitoring networks.
2.1 Photographic Monitoring
2.1.1 Network Operations
The photographic network operated normally during the past month.
2.1.2 Monitoring Equipment and Procedures
The availability of simple, rugged, reliable camera systems is
decreasing. To satisfy the "high-tech" consumer market, camera
manufacturers are producing fully-automatic, electronic, auto-focus,
auto-everything systems. Though these systems are great for the average
photographer, they are not well-suited to the remote monitoring demands
of the visibility network. At present, only two currently available camera
systems have been identified that are suited to these remote monitoring
demands the Contax 167 and Cannon EOS. The Contax is a tried and proven
system. The Cannon, operated in a manual mode with a modified lens, meets
specifications, but has not been field tested. ARS and its suppliers are
constantly monitoring the available equipment; and we are monitoring
advances in technology such as video or CCD imaging systems.
The data backs on both the Contax and Cannon are unable to place a
clearly visible date and time on Kodachrome 25. These data backs are
designed to work with film speeds faster than Kodachrome 25. In
-------
discussions with the COTR, ARS has suggested that the move be made to
Kodachrome 64 film so that replacement cameras with new data backs can
be effectively used. In making this decision, a variety of films were
considered and Kodachrome 64 is judged to be an excellent, fine-grain
product by all professional evaluations. In addition, by staying with a
Kodachrome film, purchasing and quality-assured processing procedures remain
unchanged. Quantitative analysis of the film with the slide scanner will
require a change in the exposure curve in the system software.
ARS is currently conducting a side-by-side comparison of Kodachrome
25 and 64. These photographs will be scanned to verify the comparability
of quantitative results. If all tests are successful, a final recommendation
will be made to change the network to Kodachrome 64 beginning with the Summer
1989 season.
2.1.3 Data Analysis and Reporting
The Fall 1988 Seasonal Report was delivered to the COTR on February 16.
As directed, only slides from IMPROVE and IMPROVE Protocol sites without
transmissometers have been qualitatively coded for visual air quality charac-
teristics and quantitatively analyzed for standard visual range (SVR). All
other slides from the photographic network are only reviewed, numbered, and
archived. Data collection statistics are recorded for all photographic
monitoring locations.
2.2 Transmissometer Monitoring
2.2.1 Network Operations
In total, 22 transmissometer locations are planned. Sixteen trans-
missometer systems were operational as of February 28, 1989. These sites
-------
are listed in Table 2-1. The six remaining transmissometer monitoring
stations were not operational due to reasons beyond our control. An update
on each of these sites is provided below:
SAN GORGONIO - This system was fully installed and capable of
operating on 4/27/88. Due to Forest Service operator
assignment problems, there has been virtually no data from this
system. In early February, ARS requested that site personnel
return the transmissometer system until the Forest Service
decides if and how it will service the site. The Forest
Service is expected to make its site servicing decisions in
March.
TONTO - ARS selected a transmissometer site in August 1988. Approval
for installation of this system was received from the Forest
Service in late February. Installation of the transmissometer
system is scheduled for late March 1989.
HAWAII - The installation has been postponed by the COTR pending
further review of technical, theoretical, and cost considerations.
CRATER LAKE - A system was fully installed and capable of operating
on 9/1/88. Severe weather has made servicing .of the receiver
station and a site re-configuration visit impossible. ARS will
request return of the system in March for servicing. An ARS
technician will install a calibrated system for summer monitoring
when weather conditions permit a site visit.
VOYAGEURS - A system was fully installed and capable of operating on
6/16/88. An ooerator was not assigned to service the site
during most of the summer and fall. Severe weather has made
servicing and a site re-configuration visit impossible. ARS
will request return of the transmissometer system in early
March. The system will be serviced, calibrated, and installed
by an ARS technician when conditions permit a site visit.
YELLOWSTONE - Severe forest fires in the Park forced postponement of
site selection and installation. Shelters and support equipment
for this site have been prepared. A site selection visit will be
made as soon as weather conditions permit. The installation will
be performed as early in the summer as possible.
-------
Table 2-1
Operational Transmissometer Network
by March 1, 1989
LOCATION NETWORK
1. Acadia National Park IMPROVE
2. Badlands National Park PROTOCOL
3. Bandelier National Monument PROTOCOL
4. Big Bend National Park IMPROVE
5. Bridger Wilderness IMPROVE
6. Canyonlands National Park IMPROVE
7. Chiricahua National Monument IMPROVE
8. Glacier National Park IMPROVE
9. Grand Canyon National Park IMPROVE
10. Guadalupe National Park PROTOCOL
11. Mesa Verde National Park IMPROVE
12. Petrified Forest National Park PROTOCOL
13. Pinnacles National Monument PROTOCOL
14. Rocky Mountain National Park IMPROVE
15. Shenandoah National Park IMPROVE
16. Yosenrite National Park IMPROVE
A report will be issued in March 1989 summarizing all data collected
at these sixteen sitas from their initial installation date through March
1, 1989. These data will be included in the transmissometer database.
Operational data collection and reporting will begin on March 1, 1989, and
will be reported quarterly starting with the Spring 1989 Seasonal Summary
Report.
2.2.2 Data Analysis and Reporting
Transmissometers calculate and report average atmospheric extinction
over the path length of the instrument. Data are recovered daily from
satellite data collection platforms. Along with extinction, ambient
temperature and relative humidity are also monitored. The data represent
one ten-minute average value for each hour. The measurement interval begins
three minutes after the hour. After collection and editing (only removing
-------
times when the monitoring equipment was malfunctioning), the data are reduced
to six-hour average values. The time periods of the four daily six-hour
average values are:
1 - 0000 to 0559 hrs
2 - 0600 to 1159 hrs
3 - 1200 to 1759 hrs
4 - 1800 to 2359 hrs
The number of valid ten-minute averages in each six-hour average is
recorded and kept in the database.
Data editing consists of removing measurements when the system was
known to be inoperative or delivering questionable data due to non-
standard operational parameters noted by on-site operators on the Log
Sheets. These conditions include optical misalignment, unknown window
transmission due to exceptionally dirty, broken, or missing window glass,
or questionable data logging and transmission.
- The data will be released rn quarterly Seasonal Summary Reports.
Figure 2-1 is a draft example of the Fall 1988 seasonal summary for
Grand Canyon National Park. The report contains data collected from
September 1, 1988, through November 30, 1988. Comments on the organ-
ization and data presentation of the report are being collected and
will be incorporated into the final version.
The top graph is a time line of all the collected six-hour average
values. The dashed line at an SVR of 13 km (bexi;-0.3 km"*) represents an
optical depth of the transmissometer sight path of approximately 2 at the
Grand Canyon. When the optical depth reaches this value, the error in
measured extinction becomes relatively large. When bext is greater than
0.3 km" , the time line becomes dashed indicating an increased uncertainty
in the measurement.
-------
GRAND CANYON NATIONAL PARK
"rcnsmisscmeter Date Summary 5 Hour Averages
Seotemoer 1, 1988 - November jC,1988
400
350 4
.309
.011
.012 ^
.015 |
319 I
- .025 5
- .038
.078
.300
X
UJ
10 20
SEPTEMBER
30
10 20
OCTOBER
31
10 20
NOVEMBER
30
STANDARD VISUAL RANGE FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE
SVR
I '
uj 300 - ' ' - -
z
^ Y
| i0°~j ' ' ' *
^ « «n ' , ,,.... ._ ,*,..
a '30 ' - ,j - - X- ,-
Z X : '
- so *
» 01 *
u. 'll^ .
1
Jtf
rtiQ 2
2
- 07* 5
~ .UZ3 Z
-.300
10 .059 66
50 .028 136
90 .018 209
FOR A GIVEN
7. OF THE TIME,
THE SVR IS
EQUAL TO THE
CORRESPONDING
SVR VALUE.
10
20 30 40 50 SO 70 30
CUMULAnvE FREQUENCY (X)
90
TRANSMISSOMETER DATA RECOVERY STATISTICS
! CATEGORY
TOTAL POSSIBLE 5-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD
j USABLE 6-HOUR AVERAGES IN THE TIME PERIOD
MUM
364
358
X
100
98
Figure 2-1.
Example of Transmissometer Data Summary for Grand Canyon
National Park.
-------
The next graph presents a time line of six-hour average relative
humidity measurements. This allows rapid determination of the effect of
increasing relative humidity on measured bext. Long periods of relative
humidity near 100% can be seen in Figure 2-1. This usually results in
corresponding periods of high bext, and is probably associated with
precipitation events. This assumption can only be verified by reviewing
simultaneous photographic data.
The bottom plot is a rank-ordered cumulative frequency plot of six-
hour average extinction values. The 10% to 90% values are plotted in 10%
increments. All extinction values greater than 0.3 are placed into one
bin at this level. The 10%, 50%, and 90% values are listed to the right
of the .plot.
The listing at the bottom contains data recovery statistics for the
season.
A database will be developed to contain all bex^, ambient temperature,
and relative humidity six-hour average values. The number of 10-minuta
values in each six-hour average will be listed. All raw data will be kept
in ASCII files by site.
2.2.3 Transmissometer Testing
Test shelters were installed at Christman Field on January 23, 1989;
however, severe February weather prevented the installation of power. The
following test station related actions were taken:
1. Instrument mounting posts and window/hood assemblies were
installed.
2. Steps for shelter access were constructed and installed.
3. Meteorological sensors and support hardware were ordered.
10
-------
4. Procedures for the first tests to be conducted were
written. The first test will be the Lamp Stability of
Intensity test.
Before any transmissometer test is conducted, a detailed test plan will
be written. The test plan will include:
1. A brief narrative summary of the test describing objectives,
procedures, instruments and support equipment, and test duration.
2. A schedule summarizing major test tasks, such as preparation,
servicing intervals, and special checks. This will be made
only for long-term tests.
3. Detailed step-by-step procedures for preparation of test
instruments and equipment, servicing and special checks.
4. All Log Sheets to be used by servicing personnel.
5. A description of data collection formats.
Test plans will be reviewed prior to testing. Long-term tests, such as
the transmitter lamp stability of intensity will start in.March. Short-term
tests that can be run concurrently will start in April.
2.2.4 Transmissometer Procurement
All ordered Optec LPV-2 transmissometers have been received. The
location of each transmissometer is shown below:
-------
Serial No. Location
001 ARS, Ft. Collins
002 Shenandoah National Park
003 Petrified Forest National Park
004 Canyonlands National Park
005 Pinnacles National Park
006 Acadia National Park
007 Grand Canyon National Park
008 ARS, Ft. Collins
009 Rocky Mountain National Park
010 Glacier National Park
Oil San Gorgonio Wilderness Area
012 Voyageurs National Park
013 Bridger Wilderness Area
014 ARS, Ft. Collins
015 Crater Lake National Park
016 Mesa Verde National Park
017 NPS, on loan to NOAA
018 NPS, on loan to NOAA
019 Bandelier National Monument
020 Badlands National Park
021 Guadalupe Mountains National Park
022 Non-NPS unit
023 Non-NPS unit
024 Big Bend National Park
025 Chiricahua National Monument
026 Yosemite National Park
027 ARS, Ft. Collins
028 ARS, Ft. Collins
029 ARS, Ft. Collins
030 ARS, Ft. Collins
031 ARS, Ft. Collins
032 ARS, Ft. Collins
2.3 Nephelometer Monitoring
Two locationsGreat Smoky Mountains and Mount Rainier National
Parkswill use nephelometers to monitor atmospheric scattering.
Measurements from the nephelometer located at Look Rock, Great Smoky
Mountains, will be collected for inclusion into the optical monitoring
database. A nephelometer will be installed at Mount Rainier in late 1989.
This nephelometer is currently being used to support transmissometer tests;
it will not be available for installation until after completion of that
program.
12
-------
2.4 NPS IMPROVE Computer System and Data Processing
2.4.1 Database Development
The NPS Visibility Database System is operational and complete. All
data through the Fall 1988 season are included, and all access programs
are fully operational. The preparation of written documentation has begun.
An important component of the Database System is the Daily Average
Database. The Daily Average Database is complete and will be the product
that will be delivered to service general data requests. The database
includes SVR daily averages, site history records, site and target
specifications, and seasonal results records. A first draft of the
documentation for this database, including the menu-driven data access
and retrieval software instructions, was completed and is under review.
2.4.2 Computer Network Operations
The computer network and slide scanner system operated normally during
the past month.
-------
3.0 IMPROVE NETWORK
This section summarizes the status and schedule of the IMPROVE
monitoring network.
3.1 Site Status
Table 3-1 summarizes the equipment status of all IMPROVE sites as of
February 28, 1989. The following subsections describe the site-specific,
operational status of transmissometer and camera installations.
3.1.1 Transmissometer Site Status
ACAOIA - The system operated well during February. The operator
left the flip mirror in the wrong position on 2/1, but
corrected the problem on 2/2 resulting in minimal data loss.
BIG BEND - The system operated well during February. The operator
changed lamps on 2/7, and dialed in a new calibration number.
High winds caused periodic ground blizzards resulting in a few
erratic readings.
CANYONLANDS - The system operated well during February. An annual
site visit is planned for March.
CHIRICAHUA - The system was installed on 2/13-17 and operated well
for the remainder of feoruary.
CRATER LAKE - The system has operated erratically. Due to winter
snowfall, no site operator inspection has taken place since
October 20, 1988.
GLACIER - A newly-calibrated instrument was installed on 1/21 and
site operators were trained. The system operated well during
February. Local weather conditions, such as fog from the
lake, nave caused scatter in the readings and have interfered
with the operator's ability to verify instrument alignment. An
alignment aid (light with timer) will be sent to the Park in
early March.
GRAND CANYON - The system operated well during February. An annual
site visit is planned for March.
GREAT SMOKY MOUNTAINS - Two nephelometers are currently operating
side-by-side at the Park. The NPS is operating one system and
the EPA is operating the other. ARS is investigating how to
best obtain the collected data for use by the IMPROVE Program.
14
-------
Table 3-1
Network Status
IMPROVE Monitoring Sites
as of February 28. 1989
Site
Abrv.
1 ACAO
Z 3IBE
3 3R1D
4 BRCA*
5 CANY
6 CHIR
7 CRLA
3 OENA
9 5LAC
10 GRCA»
11 GRSM
12 JARS
13 MEVE
14 MORA
IS ROMM
15 SAGO
17 SHEN
13 TONT
19 UEMI
20 YOSW
Site Name
Acadia National Park
Big Bend National Park
Bndger Wi Iderness
Bryce Canyon National Park
Canyonlands National Park
Chincanua National
Monument
Crater Lake National Park
Denali National Park
Glacier National Park
Grand Canyon National Park
3reat Smoky Mountains
National Park
Jarbidge Wilderness
Mesa Verde National Park
Mount Rainier National Park
Rocky Mountain National
Park
San Gorgonio Wilderness
Shenandoan National Park
Tonto National Monument
Weminuche Wilderness
Yosemite National Park
Cameras
(Auto 35mm)
1
1
1
2
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
^
1
1
1
1
1
Transmissometer
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
' 1
1
Comments
Trans, operational 11/14/87.
Trans, operational 12/2/88.
Trans, operational 7/22/88.
Trans, operational 12/20/86.
Trans, operational 2/1/89.
Trans, operational 9/2/88.
Camera system removed for winta
Trans, operational 2/5/88.
Trans, operational 12/20/86.
Trans, operational 9/16/88.
Trans, operational 11/25/87.
Trans, operational 4/29/88.
Trans, operational 3/4/88.
Trans, operational 8/19/88.
'Also SCENES Sites
-------
MESA VERDE - The system operated well during February. Due to
the location of the receiver shelter (on top of a water tank),
slight alignment adjustments are often necessary. An annual
site visit is planned for March.
MOUNT RAINIER - A nephelometer will be installed in late 1989.
ROCKY MOUNTAIN - A newly-calibrated instrument and a new antenna
with cable were installed on 1/26 and an operator was trained.
The system operated well during February.
SAN GORGONIO - Erratic readings continue to be received from the system.
Power, alignment, or a combination of problems are suspected.
Site operator support is complicated by the fact that different
operators service the transmitter and receiver. A visit to the
site was planned for January 30, but was canceled by the Forest
Service. On 1/30, ARS requested that the operator return the
instrument to ARS for servicing. It took one month for the
operator to find time to package the instrument for shipment.
On 3/1, the operator informed ARS that the system was ready for
shipment.
The Forest Service is reviewing its ability to support the site.
A decision on whether or not they will be interested in providing
continuing support is expected within a month. -Unless further
direction is received, ARS is considering the site down until the
Forest Service reaches a decision.
SHENANDOAH - The system operated well during the first week of
February. Erratic readings were received from 2/7-16; over-
voltage resets are believed to be the cause of system timing
the erratic readings. The operator reset
the system operated well for the remainder
drift resulting in
the timing on 2/16;
of February.
TONTO - The system will be installed in late March 1989.
YOSEMITE - An annual visit to the site was made on 1/30 to 2/2. The
instrument was replaced with a newly-calibrated unit. Support
equipment was adjusted and upgraded, and operators were re-trained.
The system operated well for the first part of February. After
a storm on 2/8, the readings became erratic and did not return to
normal. The reason for the erratic readings is unknown; solutions
for the problem are being studied. The site is being watched
closely.
16
-------
3.1.2 Camera Site Status
All camera systems operated normally except for the following site-
specific events:
BRYCE CANYON - Film changes were occasionally late during February
due to site inaccessibility (heavy snow).
»
NAVAJO - 35mm camera: A roll of film containing photos taken from
1/24-28 was lost at the site. Otherwise, the system has
continued to operate smoothly.
NAVAJO - 8mm camera: The 2X neutral density filter now attached to
the camera is providing improved exposures.
CRATER LAKE - No photos were taken between 12/24 and 1/3 due to a
very late film change. Very few valid photos were taken from
1/3-17 because snow and ice covered the enclosure window.
GRAND CANYON - TRUMBULL 35mm camera: A replacement camera was sent
on 1/27 in response to continuing overexposure problems. The
camera was installed by Park personnel on 2/17. No film has
been received to verify if exposures have improved.
NAVAJO AND TRUMBULL 8mm cameras: Both movie cameras continue
to operate well.
JARBIDGE - Most photos taken from 1/3-24 are invalid because snow
and ice covered the enclosure window.
3.2 IMPROVE Schedules and Milestones
3.2.1 Field Service Schedule (March and April 1989)
The following IMPROVE sites will be visited during the next two
months to perform annual transmissometer system servicing. The actual
visitation dates will depend on instrument availability, weather,
operator schedules, and the ability to calibrate replacement systems.
Canyon!ands National Park
Grand Canyon National Park
San Gorgonio may or may not be visited depending on the pending Forest
Service decision whether to continue site support.
-------
A transmissometer installation visit is planned for:
Tonto National Monument
An automatic camera installation visit is scheduled for:
Bryce Canyon National Park
3.2.2 Task Schedules (March and April 1989)
The following IMPROVE-specific milestones will be met:
o Review of day-to-day patterns, trends, and variations in trans-
missometer data (weekly meetings).
o Continue coordinating, scheduling, contacting parks, and procuring
supplies for the remainder of the transmissometer installations.
-------
4.0 NON-IMPROVE SITES TO BE OPERATED ACCORDING TO IMPROVE PROTOCOLS
This section summarizes the status and schedules of the non-IMPROVE
sites to be operated according to IMPROVE Protocols.
4.1 Site Status
Table 4-1 summarizes the equipment status of all sites as of February
28, 1989. The following subsections describe the site-specific operational
status of transmissometer and camera installations.
4.1.1 Transmissometer Site Status
BADLANDS - The system operated well during February.
BANDELIER - The system operated well during February. The operator
changed lamps and dialed in a new calibration number on 2/2.
GUADALUPE - The system operated well for the first part of February.
The operator left the transmitter flip mirror in the wrong position
from 2/7-8, and then left the receiver flip mirror in the wrong
position from 2/8-14. This resulted in data loss for a one-week -
period. The system operated well for the remainder of February.
HAWAII VOLCANOES - If approved, system installation will occur in
late 1989.
PETRIFIED FOREST - The system operated well during February. An
annual site visit is planned for March.
PINNACLES - The system operated well during February. Wet weather
and ground settling are suspected to be causing intermittent
alignment problems. A site visit to install a new receiver
mounting pier may be necessary.
VOYAGEURS - Erratic readings were received during February. Power
problems and system timing are suspected causes. A site visit
will be scheduled as soon as weather permits.
YELLOWSTONE - Installation is scheduled for Summer 1989.
.9
-------
Table 4-1
Network Status
Non-IMPROVE to be Operated Under IMPROVE Protocol Sites
as of February 28. 1989
Site
Abrv.
1 ARCH
2 8AOL
3 8ANO
4 GRSA
5 GUMO
6 HALE
7 HAVQ
3 ISRO
9 LAVO
10 NACA
11 PEFO
12 FINN
13 PORE
14 REOW
15 VIIS
16 VOYA
17 YELL
Site Name
Arches National Park
Badlands National Park
Sandelier National Monument
Great Sand Dimes National
Monument
Guadalupe Mountains
National Park
Haleakala National Park
Hawaii Volcanoes National
Park
Isle Royale National Park
Lassen Volcanic National
Park
National Capital Region
Petrified Forest National
Park
Pinnacles National
Monument
Point Reyes National
Seashore
Redwood National Park
Virgin Islands National
Park
Voyageurs National Park
Yellowstone National Park
Cameras
Auto
35mm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
i
i
i
i
i
Auto
OfTHft
Transmissometer
1
1
1
1
1
I
Comments
System operational as of
1/15/88.
System operational as of
10/7/88.
System operational as of
11/18/88.
Installed on 12/5/88.
Trans, operational 4/17/8
Trans, operational 3/25/8
Trans, operational 7/13/8
-------
4.1.2 Camera Site Status
All camera systems operated normally except for the following site-
specific events:
ARCHES - The new site operator failed to load the film properly for
two consecutive periods. No photos were taken from 1/9 to 1/30.
BANDELIER - A repaired camera system was installed on 2/2. No photos
have been taken since 11/15 due to a combination of operator
errors, equipment malfunctions, and delayed communication from the
Park to ARS concerning problems. The system appears to have worked
properly from 2/2 to 2/24, although film is not yet back from
processing.
HALEAKALA - No photos were taken from 1/12-23 because the film was
incorrectly loaded.
HAWAII VOLCANOES - A request for an alignment adjustment was sent
to this site on 1/23. The adjustment was made on 2/10 and will
include more of the mountain range in the view.
YELLOWSTONE - Continual overexposures prompted a replacement camera
to be sent on 2/1. It was installed on 2/13, but to date, no
processed film is available to check if exposures have improved.
4.2 Schedules and Milestones
4.2.1 Field Service Schedules
The following NFS IMPROVE Protocol sites will be visited during the
next two months to perform annual transmissometer system servicing. The
actual visitation dates will depend on instrument availability, weather,
operator schedules, and the ability to calibrate replacement systems.
Petrified Forest National Park
Pinnacles National Monument
A visit to Voyageurs National Park will be made as soon as weather permits.
It may not be practical to visit the site before late spring.
4.2.2 Task Schedules
Major task schedules parallel the IMPROVE schedules presented
in Section 3.2.2.
21
-------
5.0 AUXILIARY MONITORING SITES
This section summarizes the status and schedules of all Auxiliary
monitoring sites.
5.1 Site Status
Table 5-1 summarizes the equipment status of all sites as of February
28, 1989. During February the following camera-related site-specific
events occurred:
NFS SITES
CARLSBAD CAVERNS - After repeated attempts to resolve problems with
the Park staff, ARS sent a memorandum to the COTR regarding
this site on 1/23. To date, no film has been received from the
site and no one at the Park has responded to ARS' phone
messages. ARS will not take any further action with the Park
until directed to do so by the COTR.
DEATH VALLEY - The camera system was not serviced from 12/31/88 to
1/20/89 due to a lack of personnel. Film has been received for
1/21 to 2/13, but is not back from processing.
GRAND TETON - No photographs were taken from 12/14/88 - 1/13/89 due
to a lack of personnel.
WIND CAVE - No photographs were taken from 1/20 to 2/9. A blank roll
of film was followed by a roll that did not advance past the
documentation photo. The operator.has been instructed to follow
trouble-shooting procedures and to review instructions for loading
film.
BLM SITES
CRAIG - No photographs were taken from 1/21 to 1/29. Extremely low
temperatures at this site made operation of the system impossible.
FOREST SERVICE SITES
Forest Service visibility monitoring will no longer be administered
through the NPS contract office. The Forest Service has awarded a
separate contract to support their monitoring efforts.
-------
Table 5-1
Network Status
Auxiliary Monitoring Sites
as of February 28, 1989
Site
Abrv.
NPS
1
2
3
4
5
S
7
3
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
IS
17
18
19
20
21
3LM
4
2
3
4
BUR I
CACA
CARE
CAMO
CHCU
COLH
CRMO
OEVA
OINO
EVER
GRTE
JOTR
LABE
LECA
MOOS
NOCA
OLYA
SAGU
THRO
WICA
ZION
CRAI
BLCA
GRRI
KEMM
Site Name
Buffalo National River
Carlsbad Caverns National Park
Capital Reef National Park
Capulin Volcano National Hon.
Chaco Culture National Historic
Park
Colorado National Monument
Craters of the Moon National
Monument
Death Valley National Monument
Dinosaur National Monument
Everglades National Park
Grand Teron National Park
Joshua Tree National Monument
Lava Beds National Monument
Lehman Caves National Monument
Moosehorn National Wild. Refuge
North Cascades National Park
Olympic National Park
Saguaro National Monument
Theodora Roosevelt National Park
Wind Cave National Park
Zion National Park
Craig
Black Canyon of the Sunnison
National Monument
Green River Resource Area
Kemmerer
Cameras
(Auto 35mm)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cameras
(8mm time
laose)
1
1
1
Comments
Site name changed from Big Sandy
to Green River Res. Area (GRRI).
-------
5.2 Schedules and Milestones
5.2.1 Task Schedules
Major task schedules parallel the IMPROVE schedule presented in
Section 3.2.2.
-------
6.0 SCENES SITES
This section summarizes the status and schedules specific to the
SCENES monitoring sites.
6.1 Site Status
Table 6-1 summarizes the equipment status of all sites as of February
28, 1989. Note that Grand and Bryce Canyons are also IMPROVE sites; they
are discussed in Section 3.0. The following site-specific events occurred
in February:
LAKE MEAD - Only 65 photographs out of a possible 160 were taken from
11/14/88 to 1/4/89 due to the following:
11/14 - 11/30 alarms turned off
12/11 - 12/15 late film change
12/27 - 01/04 late film change
The exposed film for the period 11/14 - 1/4 was not received at
ARS until 1/18 and was not back from processing until 1/31.
-------
Table 6-1
Network Status
SCENES Monitoring Network
as of February 28. 1989
Site
Abrv.
1 8RCN*
Z GLCA
3 GRCT*
4 LAME
Site Name
Bryce Canyon National Park
Glen Canyon National
Recreation Area
Grand Canyon National Park
Lake Mead National
Recreation Area
Cam*
Auto
35mm
2
I
1
1
iras
Auto
8mm
1"
1**
I"
Trans-
misso-
meter
«
1
Tele-
radio-
meter
Comments
* Also an IMPROVE Monitoring Site
"Special winter photography program (see Section 7.2)
26
-------
7.0 OTHER CONTRACT SUPPORT
This section summarizes additional support provided within the contract
7.1 Data/Equipment Requests
Persons or organizations requesting data submit their request in
writing to the COTR. ARS responds to each request approved by the COTR.
The following requests were serviced during February.
Individual Agency Request
0, Morse NPS, Denver At the request of D. Morse, dupli-
cate slides of Yosemite--Telegraph
Hi 11--from the slide spectrum
archive were sent to J. Goldsmith
(NPS-AIR, Western Region) on 2/28.
M. Scruggs NPS, Denver A variety of cumulative frequency
analyses for time of day and
combined seasons, were performed
on Voyageurs data. The data
analyses were delivered to
M. Scruggs on 2/22.
The following standard procadure for slide requests will be followed.
If a park of other interested parties call ARS to request representative
ranges of visibility conditions, the caller will be referred to Dee Morse
(NPS-Denver). Data or other special requests will be referred to the COTR.
ARS will fill no request unless it is approved by the COTR.
7.2 Winter Photographic Monitoring at Grand, Bryce, and Glen Canyons.
Intensive photographic monitoring will be conducted from November
1988 through March 15, 1989 at Grand, Bryce, and Glen Canyons to enhance
the winter visibility database for these Colorado Plateau sites. Slides
will be taken 9 times a day, and 3mm time-lapse photography will be taken
from sunrise to sunset. The following views will be documented.
27
-------
Grand Canyon Navajo Mountain
Mt. Trumbull
Bryce Canyon Navajo Mountain
Glen Canyon Navajo Mountain
The equipment was installed in November and continues to operate.
Site-specific details for Grand Canyon and Bryce Canyon are provided in
Section 3.1.2, and for Glen Canyon in Section 6.1.
28
-------
8.0 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
The NFS notified ARS of its intentions to exercise the contract
option for Year 3. ARS will prepare a Work Plan and Cost Proposal by
March 10, 1989.
29
-------
Appendix H
Monitoring for Reasonably Attributable Impact
of Local Sources at
Voyageurs National Park
Petrified Forest National Park and
Moosehorn Wilderness
-------
MONITORING FOR REASONABLY ATTRIBUTABLE IMPACT
OF LOCAL SOURCES AT
VOYAGEURS NATIONAL PARK
PETRIFIED FOREST NATIONAL PARK AND
MOOSEHORN WILDERNESS
Submitted to
Marc Pitchford
U.S. EPA
Environmental Monitoring Systems Lab
P.O. Box 15017
944 East Harmon
Las Vegas, Nevada 89114
Prepared by
AIR RESOURCE SPECIALISTS, INC.
May 5, 1988
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1
2.0 PETRIFIED FOREST NATIONAL PARK 2
3.0 VOYAGEURS NATIONAL PARK 6
4.0 MOOSEHORN NATIONAL WILDERNESS 8
5.0 CONCLUSIONS 9
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
2-1 Petrified Forest National Park - Initial Monitoring
View Southeast Toward Blue Mesa 3
2-2 Petrified Forest National Park - Second Monitoring
View Southwest Toward Cholla Power Plant 4
2-3 Petrified Forest National Park - View of Layered Haze
on the Distant Horizon 5
3-1 Voyageurs National Park - 35mm Camera View 7
-------
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The IMPROVE Committee directed Air Resource Specialists, Inc. (ARS)
to install 8mm time-lapse and 35mm color-slide camera systems at Voyageurs
and Petrified Forest National Parks to access the possible visual air
quality impact in class I areas by plumes from local sources. ARS personnel
traveled to Petrified Forest National Park with W. Malm, of the National
Park Service, to select and install the monitoring systems. W. Malm
traveled to Voyageurs to select the monitoring site; the equipment was
supplied and shipped by ARS. National Park Service personnel installed the
camera systems after phone conversations with ARS staff.
The IMPROVE Committee also directed ARS to provide an 8mm time-lapse
system for installation at Moosehorn National Wilderness. Bud Rolofson, of
the Fish and Wildlife Service, traveled to Moosehorn Wilderness to site the
8mm time-lapse system. The system was shipped to Moosehorn and installed by
Fish and Wildlife personnel. No systematic, 35mm color-slide photography was
initiated at the Moosehorn site.
The following sections describe the collected data from each site.
-------
2.0 PETRIFIED FOREST NATIONAL PARK
The combined 8mm time-lapse and 35mm color-slide system began
operation on March 13, 1987. The system was Installed with the 8mm and 35mm
cameras viewing the same sight path. The view was southeast overlooking the
length of the Park toward Blue Mesa. The system operated at this location
until July 31, 1987. Figure 2-1 is a photograph of the monitoring view.
During this time period, no visible plumes were recorded by either the
8mm time-lapse or 35mm slide systems. The IMPROVE Committee directed ARS to
move the monitoring systems to another location in the Park looking southwest
outside of the Park boundaries toward the Cholla Generating Station (a coal-
fired power plant located approximately 40 km from the Park boundaries).
The power plant is to the right of the center-of-view, located just over the
horizon and not directly visible in the photographic record. Figure 2-2 is
a photograph of the new monitoring vista.
The system operated until March 1, 1988. During this monitoring period,
no visible plumes were recorded entering National Park areas. Occasional
discoloration on the horizon was visible, but not readily identifiable or
traceable to any specific source. Figure 2-3 is an example of this distant,
elevated layer of haze. Thus, the IMPROVE Committee decided to discontinue
any further special photographic monitoring at Petrified Forest and directed
ARS to remove the equipment which was accomplished in early April 1988.
-------
»**£>-~₯f^^iJ^^?'
-&V4W4. ICS^fe^Sf^Pl^i
'fe;v'-^:^^,-^i.^J
» --. ,--.;' :-» -f^w ^*"->""»5p^vt'jf''5f^!'r-«'s
' ' " ' '"" - ~*",';"'*,-1 .-"T"fi^'* »**'*'»'
Figure 2-1.
Petrified Forest National Park
Southeast Toward Blue Mesa.
- Initial Monitoring View
-------
"' * iJiifcw?1** - ^^.-f-1*** "* ^f\f -'"|f-s T? ^^''MiVfc*^^* *tj4^
^ rj;^ .-->.- ^**;V.>-y^V..a«4S
f.'-':.' - - "" 1 ."?'-*'> .'- : '"V.
'"''.5-^--,<" ,S,^"T ^^^
Figure 2-2.
Petrified Forest National Park - Second Monitoring View
Southwest Toward Cholla Power Plant.
-------
Horizon.
Haze on
-------
3.0 VOYAGEURS NATIONAL PARK
The 8mm time-lapse system began operation on October 24, 1986, viewing
north across Kabetogama Lake. The nearest sources were approximately 30 km
west-northwest of the vista. The 35mm camera was sited by Park personnel to
view east through the Park to a more distant horizon feature. The new vista
has a more appropriate target for microdensitometry visual air quality
analysis. Figure 3-1 is a photograph of this monitoring view.
The systems were in operation until April 1988. During this period,
no distinct, easily-identifiable plumes were visible in either the 8mm time-
lapse or 35mm slide data. The IMPROVE Committee directed ARS to have Park
personnel discontinue operation of the camera systems as of April 20, 1988.
-------
Figure 3-1. Voyeurs National Park - 35 Camera View.
-------
4.0 MOOSEHORN NATIONAL WILDERNESS
An 8mm time-lapse camera system has been in operation at Moosehorn
Wilderness. Due to difficult winter access, the camera was relocated.
The two locations are detailed below:
Location 1
October 5, 1987 -
Camera Location
November 15, 1987
Magurrewock Mountain
Vista Photographed Woodland Georgia Pacific Mill
Azimuth 264 degrees
Location 2
November 16, 1987 - February 14, 1988
Camera Location Clearcut End of McConvet Road
Vista Photographed Woodland Georgia Pacific Mill
Azimuth 292 degrees
The 8mm time-lapse has shown a visible plume being emitted from the
pulp mill nearly every day. The majority of the time, the plume appears to
cross over ihe Wilderness boundary. Since no 35mm photography is available,
the time-lapse film has been transferred to video tape which accompanies this
report. The camera continues in operation and film is being processed and
archived by ARS.
-------
5.0 CONCLUSIONS
Photographic monitoring at Petrified Forest and Voyageurs National
Parks for a period of one year has not been able to discern any identifiable
plumes entering class I areas. The photographic record has been archived
and the special monitoring discontinued as of April 1988 at both Parks.
Time-lapse monitoring of emissions from a pulp mill located near
Moosehorn Wilderness has identified many cases of visible plumes entering
the class I area. The 8mm time-lapse from October 5, 1987, to February 14,
1988, has been transferred to video tape for distribution with this report.
Photographic monitoring with the 8mm time-lapse camera continues.
-------
TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
(Please read Instructions on the reverse before completing)
1. REPORT NO.
EPA-450/4-90-008b
3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
IMPROVE Progress Report
Appendices 8 - H
5. REPORT DATE
May 1990
6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
7. AUTHOR(S)
Marc Pitchford
David Joseph
8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO.
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAMElftND ADDRESS
Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory
I). S. Environmental Protection Agency
Las Vegas, Nevada 93478
10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
16. ABSTRACT
In Section 169A of the Clean Air Act as amended August 1977, Congress declared
as a national goal "the prevention of any future, and the remedying of any existing,
impairment of visibility in mandatory class I Federal areas which impairment results
from manmade air pollution."' Mandatory class I Federal areas are national parks
greater in size than 6000 acres, wilderness areas greater in size than 5000 acres and
international parks that were in existence on August 7, 1977. This section required
the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) to promulgate regulations requiring States
to develop programs in their State Implementation Plans (SIPs) providing for visi-
bility protection in these areas. EPA promulgated these regulations on December 2,
1980.3
This report summarizes the progress made to date in developing and implementing
the interagency monitoring network which supports the effort, Interagency Monitoring
of Protected Visual Environments (IMPROVE).
17.
-------